Yealink SIP-T2 SERIES Administrator's Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Yealink Manuals
  4. IP Phone
  5. SIP-T2 Series
  6. Administrator's manual

Yealink SIP-T2 SERIES Administrator's Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for SIP-T2 SERIES:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Table Of Contents
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual See also: Administrator's Manual
In

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the SIP-T2 SERIES and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Yealink SIP-T2 SERIES

Summary of Contents for Yealink SIP-T2 SERIES

  • Page 2: Declaration Of Conformity

    Copyright Copyright © 2016 YEALINK(XIAMEN) NETWORK TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD. Copyright © 2016 Yealink(Xiamen) Network Technology CO., LTD. All rights reserved. No parts of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Yealink(Xiamen) Network Technology CO., LTD.

  • Page 3: Class B Digital Device Or Peripheral

    Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately. Customer Feedback We are striving to improve our documentation quality and we appreciate your feedback. Email your opinions and comments to DocsFeedback@yealink.com.

  • Page 4: Gnu Gpl Information

    GPL. Please refer to the GPL for the exact terms and conditions of the license. The original GPL license, source code of components licensed under GPL and used in Yealink products can be downloaded from Yealink web site: http://www.yealink.com/GPLOpenSource.aspx?BaseInfoCateId=293&NewsCateId=293&CateId=293.

  • Page 5: About This Guide

    IP Phones Deployment Guide for BroadSoft UC-One Environments, which describes how to  configure BroadSoft features on the BroadWorks web portal and IP phones. For support or service, please contact your Yealink reseller or go to Yealink Technical Support online: http://support.yealink.com/. Conventions Used in Yealink Documentations Yealink documentations contain a few typographic conventions.

  • Page 6: In This Guide

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Convention Description Settings->Upgrade.). Also used to emphasize text (e.g., Important!). http(s)://[IPv6 Used to show the format of examples (e.g., address] ), or to show the title of a section in the reference...

  • Page 7: Summary Of Changes

    About This Guide Summary of Changes This section describes the changes to this guide for each release and guide version. Changes for Release 80, Guide Version 80.132 The following sections are new for this version: Local Conference on page  Output Resolution on page ...

  • Page 8: Changes For Release 80, Guide Version 80.131

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Getting Information from Talk Statistics on page  Appendix D: Configuring DSS Key on page  Appendix F: Configurations Defined Never be Saved to <MAC>-local.cfg file on page 1007  Changes for Release 80, Guide Version 80.131...

  • Page 9: Changes For Release 80, Guide Version 80.95

    About This Guide Appendix C: Trusted Certificates on page  Changes for Release 80, Guide Version 80.95 Major updates have occurred to the following sections: Transport Layer Security on page  Appendix C: Trusted Certificates on page  Changes for Release 80, Guide Version 80.91 The following section is new for this version: Onscreen Keyboard Input Method Customization on page...

  • Page 10: Changes For Release 80, Guide Version 80.82

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Connecting the Handset and Optional Headset (not Applicable to CP860 IP Phones)  page Connecting the Power and Network on page  Configuring Transmission Methods of the Internet Port and PC Port on page ...

  • Page 11: Changes For Release 80, Guide Version 80.80

    Changes for Release 80, Guide Version 80.80 This version is updated to incorporate CP860 IP phones. Documentations of the newly released SIP-T40P IP phones have also been added. The following sections are new for this version: Conventions Used in Yealink Documentations on page ...

  • Page 12: Changes For Release 80, Guide Version 80.60

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Changes for Release 80, Guide Version 80.60 Documentations of the newly released SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones have also been added. The following sections are new for this version: Ringing Timeout on page ...
  • Page 13 About This Guide Redial Tone on page  Ringer Device for Headset on page  SIP IP Direct Auto Answer on page  Allow SIP IP Call on page  Accept SIP Trust Server Only on page  Transfer Mode via Dsskey on page ...

  • Page 14: Changes For Release 80, Guide Version 80.20

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones DTMF on page  Remote Phone Book on page  VLAN on page  Network Address Translation on page  Comfort Noise Generation on page  Phone Lock on page ...
  • Page 15 About This Guide IPv6 Support on page  Viewing Log Files on page ...
  • Page 16 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones...

  • Page 17: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents Table of Contents About This Guide ................v Documentations ..................................v Conventions Used in Yealink Documentations ......................v In This Guide ....................................vi Summary of Changes ................................vii Changes for Release 80, Guide Version 80.132 ....................vii Changes for Release 80, Guide Version 80.131 ....................
  • Page 18 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Connecting the Optional Extension Microphones (Only Applicable to CP860 IP Phones) .... 33 Connecting the Optional USB Flash Drive (Only Applicable to SIP VP-T49G and CP860 IP Phones) ....................................... 33 Connecting the Optional PC or Mobile Device (Only Applicable to CP860 IP Phones)....34 Connecting the Optional External Monitor (Only Applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP Phones) .....

  • Page 19: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents Bluetooth ....................................139 Wi-Fi ......................................142 Enable Page Tips ................................... 150 Label Length .................................... 152 Account Registration ................................153 Call Display ....................................166 Display Method on Dialing ............................... 170 Web Server Type ................................... 172 Time and Date ..................................175 NTP Time Server ................................
  • Page 20 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Ringer Device for Headset ..............................296 Auto Redial ....................................298 Auto Answer .................................... 300 SIP IP Direct Auto Answer..............................307 Allow SIP IP Call ..................................308 Accept SIP Trust Server Only ............................310 Call Completion ..................................
  • Page 21 Table of Contents Incoming Intercom Calls ............................470 Call Timeout .................................... 473 Ringing Timeout ..................................474 Send user=phone ................................. 474 SIP Send MAC ..................................477 SIP Send Line................................... 479 Reserve # in User Name ..............................482 Password Dial..................................484 Unregister When Reboot ..............................486 100 Reliable Retransmission .............................
  • Page 22 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Server Domain Name Resolution .......................... 662 Static DNS Cache................................... 666 VLAN ......................................674 LLDP ....................................675 CDP ....................................678 Manual Configuration for VLAN in the Wired Network ................680 DHCP VLAN ..................................684 Configuring VLAN Feature in the Wireless Network ..................
  • Page 23 Table of Contents Comfort Noise Generation ............................861 Jitter Buffer ..................................863 Configuring Video Features ............867 Video Settings ..................................867 Video Codecs ..................................876 Configuring Security Features ..........881 User Password ..................................881 Administrator Password ..............................883 Auto-Logout Time ................................884 Phone Lock ....................................
  • Page 24 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Power and Startup Issues ............................978 Hardware Issues ................................979 Other Issues ................................... 979 Appendix..................983 Appendix A: Glossary ................................983 Appendix B: Time Zones ..............................985 Appendix C: Trusted Certificates ............................ 986 Appendix D: Configuring DSS Key ..........................

  • Page 25: Product Overview

    Product Overview Product Overview This chapter contains the following information about IP phones: VoIP Principle  SIP Components  SIP IP Phone Models  Expansion Module  VoIP Principle VoIP VoIP (Voice over Internet Protocol) is a technology using the Internet Protocol instead of traditional Public Switch Telephone Network (PSTN) technology for voice communications.

  • Page 26: Sip Components

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones SIP provides capabilities to: Determine the location of the target endpoint -- SIP supports address resolution, name  mapping, and call redirection. Determine media capabilities of the target endpoint -- Via Session Description Protocol ...

  • Page 27: Sip Ip Phone Models

    3261), and they can only be used within a network that supports this model of phone. For a list of key features available on Yealink IP phones running the latest firmware, refer to Features of IP Phones on page 15.

  • Page 28: Physical Features Of Ip Phones

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Physical Features of IP Phones This section lists the available physical features of SIP VP-T49G, SIP-T48G, SIP-T46G, SIP-T42G, SIP-T41P, SIP-T40P, SIP-T29G, SIP-T27P, SIP-T23P/G, SIP-T21(P) E2, SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860 IP phones.
  • Page 29 Product Overview SIP-T48G Physical Features: 7” 800 x 480 pixel color touch screen with backlight 24 bit depth color ® 16 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 26 dedicated hard keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps Ethernet ports 1*RJ12 (6P6C) expansion module port...
  • Page 30 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones SIP-T46G Physical Features: 4.3” 480 x 272 pixel color display with backlight 24 bit depth color ® 16 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker...
  • Page 31 Product Overview SIP-T42G Physical Features: 192 x 64 graphic LCD ® 12 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 30 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100/1000Mbps Ethernet ports 1*RJ12 (6P6C) EHS36 headset adapter port 10 LEDs: 1*power, 6*line, 1*mute, 1*headset, 1*speakerphone...
  • Page 32 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones SIP-T41P Physical Features: 192 x 64 graphic LCD ® 6 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 30 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys...
  • Page 33 Product Overview SIP-T40P Physical Features: 132 x 64 graphic LCD ® 3 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 27 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100Mbps Ethernet ports 1*RJ12 (6P6C) EHS36 headset adapter port 4 LEDs: 1*power, 3*line...
  • Page 34 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones SIP-T29G Physical Features: 4.3” 480 x 272 pixel color display with backlight 24 bit depth color ® 16 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker...
  • Page 35 Product Overview SIP-T27P Physical Features: 240 x 120 graphic LCD ® 6 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 35 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100Mbps Ethernet ports 1*RJ12 (6P6C) expansion module port 11 LEDs: 1*power, 8*line, 1*headset, 1*message...
  • Page 36 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones SIP-T23P/G Physical Features: 132 x 64 graphic LCD with 4-level grayscales ® 3 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 27 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys...
  • Page 37 Product Overview SIP-T21(P) E2 Physical Features: 132 x 64 graphic LCD ® 2 VoIP accounts, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible 26 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 4 LEDs: 1*power, 2*line, 1*message HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset, HD Speaker 1*RJ9 (4P4C) handset port 1*RJ9 (4P4C) headset port 2*RJ45 10/100Mbps Ethernet ports...
  • Page 38 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones SIP-T19(P) E2 Physical Features: 132 x 64 graphic LCD ® Single VoIP account, Broadsoft Validated/Asterisk Compatible 24 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys 1 LED: 1*power HD Voice: HD Codec, HD Handset...

  • Page 39: Key Features Of Ip Phones

    Product Overview CP860 Physical Features: 192 x 64 graphic LCD One VoIP account 20 dedicated hard keys and 4 context-sensitive soft keys HD Voice: HD Codec 1 mobile phone/PC port: 3.5mm 1*RJ45 10/100Mbps Ethernet port 2*EXT mic ports 1*USB2.0 port Security lock port 3 LED indicators Power adapter (optional): AC 100~240V input and DC 5V/2A output...
  • Page 40 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones answer. Advanced Features: BLF, server redundancy, distinctive ring tones, remote phone book, LDAP. Codecs and Voice Features  Wideband codec: G.722, Opus (Opus is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones) Narrowband codec: G.711, G.726, G.729, iLBC, G.723 (G.723 is not applicable to...

  • Page 41: Expansion Module

    Product Overview Security  HTTPS (server/client) SRTP (RFC 3711) H.235 (T-REC-H.235.8) Transport Layer Security (TLS) VLAN (802.1q), QoS Digest authentication using MD5/MD5-sess Secure configuration file via AES encryption Phone lock for personal privacy protection Admin/User configuration mode 802.1X authentication Expansion Module This section introduces EXP20 and EXP40 expansion modules.
  • Page 42 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones 20 additional keys through page switch Daisy-chain 6 modules up to 120 keys Expansion module (≤2) is powered by the host phone 2*RJ-12 (6P6C) ports for data in and out EXP40...

  • Page 43: Getting Started

    Getting Started Getting Started This chapter provides basic information and installation instructions of SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860 IP phones. This chapter provides the following sections: Connecting the IP Phones  Initialization Process Overview  Verifying Startup  Reading Icons  Configuration Methods ...

  • Page 44: Attaching The Stand And The Optional Wall Mount Bracket (Not Applicable To Cp860 Ip Phones)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Attaching the Stand and the Optional Wall Mount Bracket (not Applicable to CP860 IP Phones) To attach the stand and the optional wall mount bracket: For SIP VP-T49G: Desk Mount Method Note Wall Mount Method is not applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones.
  • Page 45 Getting Started For SIP-T48G: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional) The top two slots on SIP-T48G IP phones are plugged up by silica gel. You need to pull out silica Note gel before attaching the wall mount bracket.
  • Page 46 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones For SIP-T46G: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 47 Getting Started For SIP-T42G/T41P/T40P: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 48 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones For SIP-T29G/T27P: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 49 Getting Started For SIP-T23P/T23G: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 50 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones For SIP-T21(P) E2: Desk Mount Method Wall Mount Method (Optional)
  • Page 51 The hookswitch tab has a lip which allows the handset to stay on-hook when the IP phone is Note mounted vertically. Yealink Wall Mount Quick For more information on how to mount the IP phone to a wall, refer to Installation...

  • Page 52: Inserting The Camera (Only Applicable To Sip Vp-T49G Ip Phones)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Inserting the Camera (Only Applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP Phones) To insert the camera: For SIP VP-T49G: Connecting the Handset and Optional Headset (not Applicable to CP860 IP Phones) To connect the handset and optional headset:...
  • Page 53 For SIP-T27P: Note Wireless headset adapter EHS36 or Bluetooth USB dongle BT40 should be purchased separately. Yealink EHS36 User For more information on how to use the EHS36 on the IP phone, refer to Guide. Bluetooth USB dongle BT40 can only be used on the SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G IP phones. For more...

  • Page 54: Connecting The Power And Network

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones For SIP-T19(P) E2: Connecting the Power and Network AC Power (Optional) To connect the AC power and network: Connect the DC plug of the power adapter to the DC5V (for SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860) or DC12V (for SIP VP-T49G) port on the IP phone and connect the other end of the power adapter into an electrical power outlet.
  • Page 55 For more information, refer to For CP860: Note The IP phone should be used with Yealink original power adapter only. The use of the third-party power adapter may cause the damage to the phone. Power over Ethernet With the included or a regular Ethernet cable, IP phones can be powered from a PoE-compliant switch or hub.
  • Page 56 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To connect the PoE: Connect the Ethernet cable between the Internet port on the IP phone and an available port on the in-line power switch/hub. For SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21P E2/T19P E2: For CP860: Note If in-line power switch/hub is provided, you don’t need to connect the phone to the power...

  • Page 57: Connecting The Optional Extension Microphones (Only Applicable To Cp860 Ip Phones)

    Connecting the Optional Extension Microphones (Only Applicable to CP860 IP Phones) You can connect optional extension microphones to enhance the room coverage of the conference phone. The Yealink-provided extension microphone kit contains two extension microphones. To connect the extension microphones: Connect the free end of the optional extension microphone cable to one of the MIC ports on the phone.

  • Page 58: Connecting The Optional Pc Or Mobile Device (Only Applicable To Cp860 Ip Phones)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To connect a USB flash drive: Insert a USB flash drive into the USB port on the phone. For SIP VP-T49G: For CP860: Connecting the Optional PC or Mobile Device (Only Applicable...

  • Page 59: Connecting The Optional External Monitor (Only Applicable To Sip Vp-T49G Ip Phones)

    Getting Started To connect a PC or mobile device: Connect one end of the 3.5mm jack cable to the PC/mobile port on the phone, and connect the other end to the headset jack on the mobile device or the AUX/MIC jack on the PC. Connecting the Optional External Monitor (Only Applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP Phones) You can connect an external monitor to the IP phone to have a clearer view with the far site...

  • Page 60: Initialization Process Overview

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Connect one end of the HDMI cable to the HDMI port on the phone, and connect the other end to the HDMI port on the external monitor. Note The Extended Display Accessories ED10 which is not included with your IP phone is required for connecting the external monitor.
  • Page 61 Getting Started Configuring the VLAN If the IP phone is connected to a switch, the switch notifies the IP phone of the VLAN information defined on the switch (if using LLDP or CDP). The IP phone can then proceed with the DHCP request for its network settings (if using DHCP).

  • Page 62: Verifying Startup

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Verifying Startup After connected to the power and network, the IP phone begins the initializing process by cycling through the following steps: The power indicator LED illuminates solid red. The message “Welcome Initializing… please wait” appears on the LCD screen when the IP phone starts up.

  • Page 63: Reading Icons

    Getting Started Reading Icons Icons associated with different features may appear on the LCD screen. The following table provides a description for each icon on IP phones. T23P/T23 T49G T48G T46G T42G/T41P T40P T29G T27P T19(P) E2 CP860 Description G/T21(P) Network is unavailable.
  • Page 64 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones T23P/T23 T49G T48G T46G T42G/T41P T40P T29G T27P T19(P) E2 CP860 Description G/T21(P) Rgistering (H.323 account) Hands-free speakerphone mode Handset mode Headset mode Voice Mail Text Message Auto Answer Do Not Disturb...
  • Page 65 Getting Started T23P/T23 T49G T48G T46G T42G/T41P T40P T29G T27P T19(P) E2 CP860 Description G/T21(P) Call Hold (audio-only) Call Mute (audio-only) Call is encrypted (video) Call is encrypted (audio-only) Ringer volume is 0 Phone Lock Received Calls (SIP/H.323 account) Placed Calls (SIP/H.323 account) Missed Calls (SIP/H.323 account)
  • Page 66 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones T23P/T23 T49G T48G T46G T42G/T41P T40P T29G T27P T19(P) E2 CP860 Description G/T21(P) Forwarded Calls (SIP/H.323 account) Received Calls (Cloud account) Placed Calls (Cloud account) Missed Calls (Cloud account) Forwarded Calls (Cloud...
  • Page 67 Getting Started T23P/T23 T49G T48G T46G T42G/T41P T40P T29G T27P T19(P) E2 CP860 Description G/T21(P) Recording cannot be stopped VPN is enabled Bluetooth mode is on Bluetooth headset is both paired and connected Bluetooth-Enabled mobile phone is both paired and connected Wi-Fi connection is successful Wi-Fi connection failed...
  • Page 68 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones T23P/T23 T49G T48G T46G T42G/T41P T40P T29G T27P T19(P) E2 CP860 Description G/T21(P) The default Bluetooth-Enabled mobile phone caller photo and Bluetooth-Enabled mobile phone contacts icon The default Cloud caller photo...
  • Page 69 Getting Started T23P/T23 T49G T48G T46G T42G/T41P T40P T29G T27P T19(P) E2 CP860 Description G/T21(P) Line key type is BLF/BLF List (BLF/BLF list idle state) Line key type is BLF/BLF List (BLF/BLF list ringing state) Line key type is BLF (BLF hold state) Line key type is BLF/BLF List (BLF/BLF list calling state)
  • Page 70 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones T23P/T23 T49G T48G T46G T42G/T41P T40P T29G T27P T19(P) E2 CP860 Description G/T21(P) Park failed Line key type is Retrieve Line key type is Intercom Line key type is DTMF/Prefix Line key type is Local...
  • Page 71 Getting Started T23P/T23 T49G T48G T46G T42G/T41P T40P T29G T27P T19(P) E2 CP860 Description G/T21(P) Line key type is DND Line key type is Recall Line key type is SMS Line key type is Record/URL Record Line key type is Record/URL Record (recording starts successfully) Line key type is Multicast...
  • Page 72 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones T23P/T23 T49G T48G T46G T42G/T41P T40P T29G T27P T19(P) E2 CP860 Description G/T21(P) mobile phone is connected successfully) Line key type is Mobile Account (Bluetooth-Enabled mobile phone connection failed) Line key type is Mobile...
  • Page 73 Getting Started T23P/T23 T49G T48G T46G T42G/T41P T40P T29G T27P T19(P) E2 CP860 Description G/T21(P) The shared line receives ring-back tone (Flashing) (Flashing) The shared line receives an incoming call (Flashing) (Flashing) The shared line is in conversation The shared line conversation is placed on public hold USB flash drive is detected USB flash drive is detecting...

  • Page 74: Configuration Methods

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configuration Methods IP phones can be configured automatically through configuration files stored on a central provisioning server, manually via phone user interface or web user interface, or by a combination of the automatic and manual methods.
  • Page 75 Getting Started file has a fixed name for each IP phone model. The name of the Common CFG file for each IP phone model is: SIP VP-T49G: y000000000051.cfg  SIP-T48G: y000000000035.cfg  SIP-T46G: y000000000028.cfg  SIP-T42G: y000000000029.cfg  SIP-T41P: y000000000036.cfg ...
  • Page 76 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones The following specified configurations.  #Configure always forward feature. forward.always.enable = forward.always.target = forward.always.on_code = forward.always.off_code = #Configure busy forward feature. forward.busy.enable = forward.busy.target = forward.busy.on_code = forward.busy.off_code = #Configure no answer forward feature.
  • Page 77 Getting Started account.X.timeout_fwd.on_code = account.X.timeout_fwd.off_code = #Configure DND feature for account X. (It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860 IP phones. X stands for the serial number of account) account.X.dnd.enable = account.X.dnd.on_code = account.X.dnd.off_code = #Configure the access URL of the firmware file. firmware.url = #Configure the access URL of configuration files.

  • Page 78: Obtaining Configuration Files And Resource Files

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones expansion_module.X.key.Y.xml_phonebook = The MAC-local CFG file enables the phone to keep user settings. For more personalized information on how to keep user settings, refer to Keep User Personalized Settings personalized on page 57.
  • Page 79 Local Contact File contact.xml Department.xml Remote Phone Book Template Menu.xml You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for template files. You can also obtain the template files online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage To download template files: Go to Yealink Document Download page and select the desired phone model.
  • Page 80 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones The following illustration shows the template files available for SIP-T23G IP phones running firmware version 80. Open the folder you extracted and identify the template file you will edit according to the table introduced above.

  • Page 81: Keep User Personalized Settings

    SIP-T46G/T23G IP phones as example for reference. Note Yealink IP phones support FTP, TFTP, HTTP and HTTPS protocols for uploading the MAC-local CFG file. This section takes the TFTP protocol as an example. Before performing the following, make sure the provisioning server supports uploading.

  • Page 82: Scenario A Keep User Personalized Configuration Settings

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default during auto provisioning. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will periodically upload the <MAC>-local.cfg file to the provisioning server to back up this file. During auto provisioning, the IP phone will download the <MAC>-local.cfg file from the provisioning server to override the one stored on the phone.
  • Page 83 Getting Started Scenario Conditions: The current firmware version of the SIP-T46G IP phone is 28.71.0.181. This firmware version  does not support keeping user personalized settings and generating a <MAC>-local.cfg file. The target firmware version of the SIP-T46G IP phone is 28.80.0.60. This firmware version ...
  • Page 84 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones then downloads firmware from the root directory of the provisioning server. The IP phone reboots to complete firmware upgrade, and then starts auto provisioning process again which is triggered by phone reboot (the power on mode is enabled by default).
  • Page 85 Getting Started auto_provision.custom.sync=1 firmware.url = tftp://192.168.1.211/44.80.0.60.rom Trigger the IP phone to perform the auto provisioning process. For more information on Triggering the IP Phone to Perform the how to trigger auto provisioning process, refer to Auto Provisioning Yealink_SIP-T2 Series_T19(P) E2_T4 section in Series_CP860_W56P_IP_Phones_Auto_Provisioning_Guide During auto provisioning, the IP phone first downloads the y000000000044.cfg file, and...

  • Page 86: Scenario B Clear User Personalized Configuration Settings

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones configurations in the 001565770984-local.cfg file saved on the IP phone are also updated. The IP phone starts up successfully, and personalized settings are kept after auto provisioning. When a user customizes feature configurations via web/phone user interface, the IP phone will save the personalized settings to the 001565770984-local.cfg file on the IP...
  • Page 87 Getting Started Scenario Operations: You can clear the personalized settings of the phone via phone or web user interface. To clear personalized configuration settings via phone user interface: Press Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin). Select Reset Local Configuration. The LCD screen prompts “Reset local configurations?”. Press the OK soft key.

  • Page 88: Scenario C Keep User Personalized Settings After Factory Reset

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Scenario C Keep user personalized settings after factory reset The IP phone requires factory reset when it has a breakdown, but the user wishes to keep personalized settings of the phone after factory reset.

  • Page 89: Scenario D Import Or Export The Local Configuration File

    Getting Started The web user interface prompts “Do you want to reset to factory?”. Click OK. After startup, all configurations of the phone will be reset to factory defaults. Configurations in the 001565770984-local.cfg file saved on the IP phone will also be cleared. But configurations in the 001565770984-local.cfg file stored on the provisioning server (tftp://192.168.1.211) will not be cleared after reset.
  • Page 90 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Scenario Operations: To export local configuration file via web user interface: Click on Settings->Configuration. Select Local Configuration from the pull-down list of Export CFG Configuration File, and then click Export to open file download window, and then save the 001565770984-local.cfg file to the local system.

  • Page 91: Provisioning Server

    Getting Started To import local configuration file via web user interface: Click on Settings->Configuration. In the Import CFG Configuration File field, click Browse to locate the 001565770984-local.cfg file from your local system and select Local Configuration from the pull-down list. Click Import.

  • Page 92: Setting Up The Provisioning Server

    MAC-oriented configuration file will override the same one in the common configuration file. Yealink supplies configuration files for each phone model, which is delivered with the phone firmware. The configuration files, supplied with each firmware release, must be used with that release.
  • Page 93 Getting Started To deploy IP phones from the provisioning server: Create per-phone configuration files by performing the following steps: Obtain a list of phone MAC addresses (the bar code label on the back of the IP phone or on the outside of the box). Create per-phone <MAC>.cfg files by using the MAC-Oriented CFG file from the distribution as templates.

  • Page 94: Configuring Basic Network Parameters

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configuring Basic Network Parameters In order to get your IP phones running, you must perform basic network setup, such as IP address and subnet mask configuration. This section describes how to configure basic network parameters for IP phones.
  • Page 95 Getting Started Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default network.internet_port.type 0, 1 or 2 Description: Configures the Internet (WAN) port type for IPv4. 0-DHCP 1-PPPoE (not applicable to SIP-T42G/T41P/CP860 IP phones) 2-Static IP Address Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “network.ip_address_mode” is set to 0 (IPv4) or 2 (IPv4 &...
  • Page 96 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select DHCP IPv4 Client and then press the Enter soft key. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. The IP phone reboots automatically to make settings effective after a period of time.
  • Page 97 Getting Started Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Off 1-On If it is set to 0 (Off), the IP phone will use the IPv4 DNS obtained from DHCP. If it is set to 1 (On), the IP phone will use manually configured static IPv4 DNS. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “network.internet_port.type”...

  • Page 98: Dhcp Option

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Network->WAN Port->IPv4->DHCP IPv4 Client->Static DNS (Enabled) ->IPv4 Sec.DNS To configure static DNS address when DHCP is used via web user interface: Click on Network->Basic.
  • Page 99 Getting Started the DHCP message. The data items themselves are also called options. DHCP can be initiated by simply connecting the IP phone with the network. IP phones broadcast DISCOVER messages to request the network information carried in DHCP options, and the DHCP server responds with specific values in corresponding options.
  • Page 100 DHCP Option 66 and Option 43 Yealink IP phones support obtaining the provisioning server address by detecting DHCP options during startup. The phone will automatically detect the option 66 and option 43 for obtaining the provisioning server address.
  • Page 101 Click Confirm to accept the change. DHCP Option 42 and Option 2 Yealink IP phones support using the NTP server address offered by DHCP. DHCP option 42 is used to specify a list of NTP servers available to the client by IP address. NTP servers should be listed in order of preference.
  • Page 102 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones local domain name (based on RFC 2132). See RFC 1035 for character restrictions. Procedure DHCP option 12 hostname can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the DHCP option 12 hostname.
  • Page 103 Getting Started Parameter Permitted Values Default The default value is SIP-T41P. For SIP-T40P IP phones: The default value is SIP-T40P. For SIP-T29G IP phones: The default value is SIP-T29G. For SIP-T27P IP phones: The default value is SIP-T27P. For SIP-T23P IP phones: The default value is SIP-T23P.

  • Page 104: Configuring Network Parameters Manually

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Enter the desired host name in the DHCP Hostname field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after a reboot.
  • Page 105 Getting Started network.internet_port.gateway network.primary_dns network.secondary_dns Configure network parameters of the IP phone manually. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) Web User Interface E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =network&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=network&q=load Configure network parameters of Phone User Interface the IP phone manually. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values...
  • Page 106 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the IP address mode. 0-IPv4 1-IPv6 2-IPv4 & IPv6 Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 107 Getting Started Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Network->WAN Port->IPv4->Static IPv4 Client->Subnet Mask network.internet_port.gateway IPv4 Address Blank Description: Configures the IPv4 default gateway. Example: network.internet_port.gateway = 192.168.1.254 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “network.ip_address_mode” is set to 0 (IPv4) or 2 (IPv4 &...
  • Page 108 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the secondary IPv4 DNS server. Example: network.secondary_dns = 202.101.103.54 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “network.ip_address_mode” is set to 0 (IPv4) or 2 (IPv4 & IPv6), and "network.internet_port.type" is set to 2 (Static IP Address). If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.

  • Page 109: Pppoe

    Getting Started Enter the desired values in the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, Primary DNS and Secondary DNS fields. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone.
  • Page 110 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure PPPoE can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure PPPoE on the IP phone. <MAC>.cfg Parameter: network.internet_port.type Configure the user name and Configuration File password for PPPoE on the IP phone.
  • Page 111 Getting Started Parameters Permitted Values Default 2-Static IP Address Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “network.ip_address_mode” is set to 0 (IPv4) or 2 (IPv4 & IPv6). If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.

  • Page 112: Configuring Transmission Methods Of The Internet Port And Pc Port

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Network->WAN Port->IPv4->PPPoE IPv4 Client->PPPoE PWD To configure PPPoE via web user interface: Click on Network->Basic. In the IPv4 Config block, mark the PPPoE radio box.
  • Page 113 Getting Started or PC Ethernet ports: Auto-negotiate  Half-duplex  Full-duplex  Auto-negotiate is configured for both Internet and PC ports on the IP phone by default. Auto-negotiate Auto-negotiate means that two connected devices choose common transmission parameters (e.g., speed and duplex mode) to transmit voice or data over Ethernet. This process entails devices first sharing transmission capabilities and then selecting the highest performance transmission mode supported by both.
  • Page 114 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Full-duplex Full-duplex transmission refers to transmitting voice or data in both directions at the same time; this means one device can send data on the line while receiving data. You can configure the...
  • Page 115 Getting Started Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default network.internet_port.speed_duplex 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 Description: Configures the transmission method of the Internet (WAN) port. 0-Auto Negotiate 1-Full Duplex 10Mbps 2-Full Duplex 100Mbps 3-Half Duplex 10Mbps 4-Half Duplex 100Mbps 5-Full Duplex 1000Mbps (only applicable to SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T29G/T23G/CP860 IP phones) Note: For SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T29G/T23G IP phones, you can set the...

  • Page 116: Configuring Pc Port Mode

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default switch supports Gigabit Ethernet. We recommend that you do not change this parameter. If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 117 Getting Started PC (LAN) port on the IP phones via web user interface or using configuration files. PC port is not applicable to CP860 IP phones. Procedure PC port mode can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the PC (LAN) port. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Parameter:...

  • Page 118: Upgrading Firmware

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select Auto Negotiate from the pull-down list of PC Port Active. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after a reboot.

  • Page 119: Upgrading Firmware Via Web User Interface

    37.80.0.10.rom Note You can download the latest firmware online: http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage. Do not unplug the network and power cables when the IP phone is upgrading firmware. Upgrading Firmware via Web User Interface To manually upgrade firmware via web user interface, you need to store firmware to your local system in advance.

  • Page 120: Upgrading Firmware From The Provisioning Server

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Click OK to confirm the upgrade. Note Do not close and refresh the browser when the IP phone is upgrading firmware via web user interface. Upgrading Firmware from the Provisioning Server IP phones support using FTP, TFTP, HTTP and HTTPS protocols to download configuration files and firmware from the provisioning server, and then upgrade firmware automatically.
  • Page 121 Getting Started Upload firmware. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T 27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=setti ngs-upgrade&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=mo d_data&p=settings-upgrade&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default auto_provision.power_on 0 or 1 Description: Triggers the power on feature to on or off. 0-Off 1-On If it is set to 1 (On), the IP phone will perform an auto provisioning process when powered Web User Interface:...
  • Page 122 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default auto_provision.repeat.minutes Integer from 1 to 43200 1440 Description: Configures the interval (in minutes) for the IP phone to perform an auto provisioning process repeatedly. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “auto_provision.repeat.enable” is set to 1 (On).
  • Page 123 Getting Started Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the end time of the day for the IP phone to perform an auto provisioning process weekly Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “auto_provision.weekly.enable” is set to 1 (On).
  • Page 124 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the access URL of the firmware file. Example: firmware.url = http://192.168.1.20/44.80.0.60.rom Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.

  • Page 125: Configuring Basic Features

    Configuring Basic Features Configuring Basic Features This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following basic features: Power Indicator LED  Notification Popups  Contrast  Wallpaper  Screen Saver  Power Saving  Backlight  Site Name ...
  • Page 126 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Call List Show Number  Missed Call Log  Local Directory  Live Dialpad  Call Waiting  Redial Tone  Ringer Device for Headset  Auto Redial  Auto Answer ...

  • Page 127: Power Indicator Led

    Configuring Basic Features Dialog Info Call Pickup  Recent Call In Dialing  ReCall  Call Number Filter  Call Park  Calling Line Identification Presentation  Connected Line Identification Presentation  DTMF  Allow Mute  Intercom  Call Timeout ...
  • Page 128 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Voice/Text Mail Power Light Flash Voice/Text Mail Power Light Flash allows the power indicator LED to flash when the IP phone receives a voice mail or a text message. Mute Power Light Flash Mute Power Light Flash allows the power indicator LED to flash when a call is muted.
  • Page 129 Configuring Basic Features http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m= mod_data&p=features-powerled&q=l Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values phone_setting.common_power_led_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the power indicator LED to be turned on. For SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: 0-Disabled (power indicator LED is off) 1-Enabled (power indicator LED is solid red) For SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones: 0-Disabled (power indicator LED is off)
  • Page 130 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Features->Power LED->Ringing Power Light Flash Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.mail_power_led_flash_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the power indicator LED to flash when the IP phone receives a voice mail or a text message.
  • Page 131 Configuring Basic Features Permitted Parameters Default Values None phone_setting.hold_and_held_power_led_flash_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the power indicator LED to flash when a call is placed on hold or is held. For SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: 0-Disabled (power indicator LED does not flash) 1-Enabled ( power indicator LED fast flashes (500ms) red) For SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones: 0-Disabled (power indicator LED does not flash)

  • Page 132: Notification Popups

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Common Power Light On. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Ringing Power Light Flash. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Voice/Text Mail Power Light Flash.
  • Page 133 Configuring Basic Features SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T 27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=feat ures-notifypop&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=mo d_data&p=features-notifypop&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values features.voice_mail_popup.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the pop-up message box when it receives a new voice mail.
  • Page 134 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the pop-up message box when it forwards an incoming call to other party. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Features->Notification Popups->Display Forward Call Popup...

  • Page 135: Contrast

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Display Text Message Popup. Click Confirm to accept the change. Contrast Contrast determines the readability of the texts displayed on the LCD screen. Adjusting the contrast to a comfortable level can optimize the screen viewing experience. When configured properly, contrast allows users to read the LCD’s display with minimal eyestrain.
  • Page 136 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default phone_setting.contrast Integer from 1 to 10 Description: Configures the contrast of the LCD screen. For T48G/T46G IP phones, it configures the LCD’s contrast of the connected EXP40 only.

  • Page 137: Wallpaper

    For SIP VP-T49G IP phones, you can also set a custom picture stored in your USB flash drive as the wallpaper. In order to do this, make sure the USB flash drive containing pictures is Yealink phone-specific user guide connected to your phone. For more information, refer to...
  • Page 138 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones let?m=mod_data&p=settings- preference&q=load Configure the wallpaper Phone User Interface displayed on the IP phone. Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default Refer to the following Refer to the following phone_setting.backgrounds...
  • Page 139 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default URL within 511 wallpaper_upload.url Blank characters Description: Configures the access URL of the wallpaper image. Example: wallpaper_upload.url = http://192.168.10.25/wallpaper.jpg Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Preference->Upload Wallpaper(480*272) Phone User Interface: None To upload custom wallpaper via web user interface:...

  • Page 140: Screen Saver

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired wallpaper from the pull-down list of Wallpaper. Click Confirm to accept the change. To change the wallpaper via phone user interface: Press Menu->Basic->Display->Wallpaper. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired wallpaper.
  • Page 141 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Screen saver can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the time to wait in the idle state before the screen saver starts. Parameter: screensaver.wait_time Configure the type of screen saver to display. Parameter: screensaver.type Specify the access URL of the custom screen saver image.
  • Page 142 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configure the time to wait in the idle state before the screen saver starts. Configure the type of screen saver to display. Upload the custom screen saver image. Web User Interface...
  • Page 143 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Settings->Preference->Screensaver Wait Time Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Display->Screensaver->Wait Time(s) screensaver.type 0 or 1 Description: Configures the type of screen saver to display. 0-System 1-Upload Picture If it is set to 0 (System), the LCD screen saver will display the system screen saver images. If it is set to 1 (Upload Picture), the LCD screen will display the custom screen saver images (you need to upload custom image files to the IP phone).
  • Page 144 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None http://localhost/all screensaver.delete Blank http://localhost/ me.(jpg/png/bmp) Description: Deletes the specified or all custom screen saver images. Example: Delete all custom screen saver images: screensaver.delete = http://localhost/all Delete a custom screen saver image (e.g., Screencapture.jpg): screensaver.delete = http://localhost/Screencapture.jpg...
  • Page 145 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default saver starts. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “screensaver.type” is set to 1 (Upload Picture) and the parameter “screensaver.upload_url” should be configured in advance. It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G, SIP-T48G, SIP-T46G and SIP-T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 146 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones The Upload Screensaver field field appears only if Screensaver Type is set to Upload Picture. The custom screen saver appears in the pull-down list of Screensaver. To set the system screen saver via web user interface: Click on Settings->Preference.

  • Page 147: Power Saving

    Configuring Basic Features To configure the screen saver wait time via web user interface: Click on Settings->Preference. Select the desired wait time from the pull-down list of Screensaver Wait Time. Click Confirm to accept the change. Power Saving The power saving feature is used to turn off the screen to conserve energy. The IP phone enters power-saving mode after it has been idle for a certain period of time.
  • Page 148 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure Power saving can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the power saving feature. Parameter: features.power_saving.enable Configure the office hour. Parameters: features.power_saving.office_h our.monday features.power_saving.office_h our.tuesday features.power_saving.office_h our.wednesday features.power_saving.office_h our.thursday...
  • Page 149 Configuring Basic Features =load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/serv let?m=mod_data&p=settings- powersaving&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 features.power_saving.enable Description: Enables or disables the power saving feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is only applicable to SIP-T48G, SIP-T46G and SIP-T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Power Saving->Power Saving Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 150 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Description: Configures the time (in minutes) to wait in the idle state before IP phone enters power-saving mode during the non-office hours. Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G, SIP-T48G, SIP-T46G and SIP-T29G IP phones.
  • Page 151 Configuring Basic Features Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G, SIP-T48G, SIP-T46G and SIP-T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Power Saving->Monday Phone User Interface: None Integer from 0 to Refer to the features.power_saving.office_hour.tuesday 23, Integer from following 0 to 23 content Description: For SIP VP-T49G IP phones:...
  • Page 152 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones For SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G IP phones: The default value is 7,12 Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G, SIP-T48G, SIP-T46G and SIP-T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Power Saving->Wednesday Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 153 Configuring Basic Features For SIP VP-T49G IP phones: The default value is 7,19 For SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G IP phones: The default value is 7,12 Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G, SIP-T48G, SIP-T46G and SIP-T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Power Saving->Firday Phone User Interface: None Integer from 0 to...
  • Page 154 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configures the starting time and duration of the day’s office hour on Sunday. Starting time and duration are separated by a comma. For SIP VP-T49G IP phones: The default value is 7,7...
  • Page 155 Configuring Basic Features Enter the starting time and ending time respectively in the desired day field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the idle timeout via web user interface: Click on Settings->Power Saving. Enter the desired value in the Office Hour Idle TimeOut field. The default value is 480, you can set to 1-600.

  • Page 156: Backlight

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Enter the desired value in the User input extension Idle TimeOut field. The default value is 10, you can set to 1-20. Click Confirm to accept the change. Backlight Backlight determines the brightness of the LCD screen display, allowing users to read easily in dark environments.
  • Page 157 Configuring Basic Features and SIP-T29G IP phones. It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Note Before you adjust the LCD’s backlight of expansion module, make sure the expansion module has been connected to the IP phone. The following table lists available methods and configuration options to configure the backlight of phone models/expansion modules.
  • Page 158 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones _data&p=settings-preference&q=load Phone User Interface Configure the backlight of the LCD screen. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting.active_backlight_level Integer from 1 to 10 Description: Configures the intensity of the LCD screen when the phone is active.
  • Page 159 Configuring Basic Features Description: Configures the delay time (in seconds) to change the intensity of the LCD screen when the IP phone is inactive. 0-Always On 1-Always Off (not applicable to SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G IP phones) 15-15s 30-30s 60-60s 120-120s 300-300s 600-600s 1800-1800s If it is set to 60 (60s), the intensity of the LCD screen will be changed when the IP phone has...
  • Page 160 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure backlight via phone user interface (take SIP-T23G IP phones for example): Press Menu->Settings->Basic Settings->Display->Backlight. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Backlight Time field.

  • Page 161: Site Name

    Phone User Interface Configure the site name. Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default String within 64 Yealink SIP setting.site_name characters VP-T49G Description: Configures the site name of the IP phone. Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones.

  • Page 162: Idle Clock

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Enter the desired value in the Site Name field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the site name via phone user interface: ->Basic->Site Name. Enter the desired name in the Site Name field.

  • Page 163: Bluetooth

    Bluetooth mode and then pair and connect the Bluetooth headset with your phone. It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G IP phones. You can also activate/deactivate the Bluetooth mode and then pair and connect the Bluetooth-Enabled mobile phone for Yealink SIP Yealink_SIP_VP-T49G_User_Guide VP-T49G IP phones.
  • Page 164 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure Bluetooth mode can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure Bluetooth mode. Parameter: features.bluetooth_enable <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Configure the Bluetooth device name. Parameter: features.bluetooth_adapter_name Configure Bluetooth mode. Navigate to: For SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p...
  • Page 165 Configures the Bluetooth device name. For SIP VP-T49G IP phones: The default value is SIP VP-T49G. For SIP-T48G IP phones: The default value is Yealink-T48G. For SIP-T46G IP phones: The default value is Yealink-T46G. For SIP-T29G IP phones: The default value is Yealink-T29G.

  • Page 166: Wi-Fi

    You can configure the country wireless channel for your phone depending on the desired area as required. Yealink IP phones support VLAN in the wireless network. For more information, refer to Configuring VLAN Feature in the Wireless Network on page 687.
  • Page 167 Configuring Basic Features sometimes there is no sound during an active call. Ensure that the bandwidth of your wireless network is able to provide stable and real-time data transmission otherwise the quality of video calls may be affected. We recommend you to use the wired network for video calls.
  • Page 168 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configure Wi-Fi feature. Configure the Wi-Fi settings. Navigate to: For SIP-T48G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =network-wifi&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m Web User Interface =mod_data&p=network-wifi&q=loa Local Specify the delay time for the phone to disconnect the wireless network.
  • Page 169 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default (X ranges from 1 to 5) Description: Configures the profile name of the wireless network X for the IP phone. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “wifi.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G and SIP-T48G IP phones.
  • Page 170 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the security mode of the wireless network X. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “wifi.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G and SIP-T48G IP phones.
  • Page 171 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Network->Wi-Fi->PSK Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Wi-Fi->Wi-Fi (On)->Add->WPA Shared Key Integer more than or wifi.status_detection_timeout equal to 0 Description: Configures the delay time (in seconds) for the phone to disconnect the wireless network after failing to detect the wi-fi signal (Beacon) from the router.
  • Page 172 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Wi-Fi Active. Click Confirm to accept the change. To add a wireless network via web user interface: Click on Network->Wi-Fi. Enter the desired value in the Profile Name field.
  • Page 173 Configuring Basic Features Click Add to accept the change. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to add more wireless networks. To adjust the priority of the added wireless network via web user interface: Click on Network->Wi-Fi. Click to select the desired wireless network which you want to adjust the priority, and then click Repeat the step 2 to adjust the priority of more wireless networks.

  • Page 174: Enable Page Tips

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Click Confirm to accept the change. To enable the Wi-Fi feature via phone user interface: ->Basic->Wi-Fi. Tap the On radio box in the Wi-Fi field. The IP phone scans the available wireless network automatically.
  • Page 175 Configuring Basic Features Phone Models Icons Description Fast flashing: The BLF monitored user receives an incoming call on the non-current page. SIP-T42G/T41P/T27P The line receives an incoming call on the non-current page. Solid: There is a parked call on the non-current page. Procedure Enable page tips can be configured using the configuration files or locally.

  • Page 176: Label Length

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Enable Page Tips. Click Confirm to accept the change. Label Length Label length allows IP phones to extend the display length of the line key label. If the label length feature is enabled, more characters will be displayed on the idle LCD screen.

  • Page 177: Account Registration

    Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.config_dsskey_length 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the extended length of the label displayed on the idle LCD screen for the line key. 0-Default 1-Extended Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G IP phones. Web User Interface: DSSKey->Line Key->Label Length Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 178 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure SIP account registration can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the SIP account registration information. Parameters account.X.enable account.X.label account.X.display_name account.X.auth_name account.X.user_name account.X.password account.X.sip_server.Y.address account.X.sip_server.Y.port account.X.outbound_proxy_enable <MAC>.cfg account.X.outbound_host account.X.outbound_port...
  • Page 179 Configuring Basic Features Configure the SIP account registration information. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =account-register&q=load&acc=0 For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=account-register&q =load&acc=0 Configure auto linekeys. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load Web User Interface Local For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=features-general&q =load...
  • Page 180 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configure the SIP account Phone User Interface registration information. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the SIP account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled...
  • Page 181 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default String within 99 account.X.display_name Blank characters Description: Configures the display name for SIP account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860)
  • Page 182 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 183 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: account.1.sip_server.1.address = yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: Account->Register->SIP Server Y->Server Host Phone User Interface: Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Accounts->SIP ServerY account.X.sip_server.Y.port Integer from 0 to 5060 65535 (X ranges from 1 to 16, Y ranges from 1 to 2) Description: Configures the port of the SIP server Y for SIP account X.
  • Page 184 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860) Web User Interface: Account->Register->Enable Outbound Proxy Server Phone User Interface: Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Accounts->Outbound Status IP address or domain account.X.outbound_host...
  • Page 185 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860) Example: account.1.outbound_port = 5060 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.outbound_proxy_enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Account->Register->Outbound Proxy Server 1->Port Phone User Interface: None IP address or domain...
  • Page 186 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860) Example: account.1.backup_outbound_port = 5060...
  • Page 187 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default The order of DSS key assigned automatically is Line Key->Ext Key. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) Example:...
  • Page 188 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones and the desired port of the outbound proxy server 1/2 in the Port field respectively. Enter the desired interval in the Proxy Fallback Interval field. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 189 Configuring Basic Features To configure auto linekeys feature via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Auto Linekeys. If Auto LineKeys is enabled, you can automatically assign multiple DSS keys with Line type for a registered line on the phone.

  • Page 190: Call Display

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To register a SIP account via phone user interface: Press Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Accounts. Select the desired account and then press the Enter soft key. Select Enabled from the Active Line field.
  • Page 191 Configuring Basic Features For SIP VP-T49G IP phones: You can customize the call information to be displayed on the IP phone as required. IP phones support five call information display methods: Number+Name, Name, Name+Number, Number or Full Contact Info (display name<sip:xxx@domain.com>). Note SIP-T42G/T41P/T40P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2 and CP860 IP phones have a limited display (up to three lines) due to their smaller screen size.
  • Page 192 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/ T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? p=settings-calldisplay&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? m=mod_data&p=settings-calldisp lay&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting.contact_photo_display.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display contact avatar when it receives an incoming call, dials an outgoing call or engages in a call.
  • Page 193 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting.call_info_display_method 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 Description: Specifies the call information display method when the IP phone receives an incoming call, dials an outgoing call or is during an active call. 0-Name+Number 1-Number+Name 2-Name 3-Number...

  • Page 194: Display Method On Dialing

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Call Information Display Method. Click Confirm to accept the change. Display Method on Dialing When the IP phone is on the pre-dialing or dialing screen, the account information will be displayed on the top left corner of the LCD screen.
  • Page 195 Configuring Basic Features For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=features-general&q =load Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.caller_name_type_on_dialing 1, 2 or 3 Description: Configures the account information displayed on the top left corner of the LCD screen when the IP phone is on the pre-dialing or dialing screen. 1-Label 2-Display Name 3-User Name...

  • Page 196: Web Server Type

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Web Server Type Web server type determines access protocol of the IP phone’s web user interface. IP phones support both HTTP and HTTPS protocols for accessing the web user interface. HTTP is an application protocol that runs on top of the TCP/IP suite of protocols.
  • Page 197 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the user to access web user interface of the IP phone using the HTTP protocol. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->Web Server->HTTP Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 198 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default network.port.https Integer from 1 to 65535 Description: Configures the HTTPS port for the user to access web user interface of the IP phone using the HTTPS protocol.

  • Page 199: Time And Date

    Configuring Basic Features A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. To configure web server type via phone user interface: Press Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Network->Webserver Type. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the HTTP Status field.

  • Page 200: Ntp Time Server

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Option Configuration Methods Phone User Interface Configuration Files Daylight Saving Time Web User Interface NTP Time Server A time server is a computer server that reads the actual time from a reference clock and distributes this information to the clients in a network.
  • Page 201 Configuring Basic Features SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =settings-datetime&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=settings-datetime& q=load Configure DHCP time feature. Phone User Interface Configure the NTP server, time zone. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default local_time.manual_ntp_srv_prior 0 or 1 Description: Configures the priority for the IP phone to use the NTP server address offered by the DHCP server.
  • Page 202 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Settings->Basic Settings->Time & Date->DHCP Time local_time.ntp_server1 IP address or domain name cn.pool.ntp.org Description: Configures the IP address or the domain name of the NTP server 1. Example: local_time.ntp_server1 = 192.168.0.5...
  • Page 203 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the interval (in seconds) to update time and date from the NTP server. Example: local_time.interval = 1000 Web User Interface: Settings->Time & Date->Synchronism (15~86400s) Phone User Interface: None local_time.time_zone -11 to +14 Description: Configures the time zone.
  • Page 204 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To configure NTP by DHCP priority feature via web user interface: Click on Settings->Time & Date. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of NTP by DHCP Priority. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 205: Time And Date Settings

    Configuring Basic Features Enter the desired time interval in the Synchronism (15~86400s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the NTP server and time zone via phone user interface: Press Menu->Settings->Basic Settings->Time & Date->SNTP Settings. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the time zone that applies to your area from the Time Zone field.
  • Page 206 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure Time and date can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the time and date manually. Parameter: local_time.manual_time_enable <MAC>.cfg Configuration File Configure the time and date formats. Parameters: local_time.time_format...
  • Page 207 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to obtain time and date from manual settings. 0-Disabled (obtain time and date from NTP server) 1-Enabled (obtain time and date from manual settings) Web User Interface: Settings->Time &...
  • Page 208 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default “MMM” represents the first three letters of the month, “YYYY” represents a four-digit year, and “YY” represents a two-digit year. Web User Interface: Settings->Time & Date->Date Format Phone User Interface: Menu->Settings->Basic Settings->Time &...

  • Page 209: Daylight Saving Time

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Date Format. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the time and date manually via phone user interface: Press Menu->Settings->Basic Settings->Time & Date->Manual Settings. Enter the date in the Date(YMD) field. Enter the time in the Time(HMS) field.
  • Page 210 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure Daylight saving time can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure DST. Parameters: local_time.summer_time local_time.dst_time_type <MAC>.cfg Configuration File local_time.start_time local_time.end_time local_time.offset_time Configure DST. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860:...
  • Page 211 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default local_time.dst_time_type 0 or 1 Description: Configures the DST time type. 0-DST by Date 1-DST by Week Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “local_time.summer_time” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Settings->Time &...
  • Page 212 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default local_time.end_time Time 12/31/23 Description: Configures the end time of the DST. Value formats are: Month/Day/Hour (for DST by Date)  Month/Week of Month/Day of Week/Hour of Day (for DST by Week) ...
  • Page 213 Configuring Basic Features Select Disabled from the pull-down list of Manual Time. Select the desired time zone from the pull-down list of Time Zone. Enter the domain name or IP address in the Primary Server and Secondary Server field respectively. Enter the desired time interval in the Synchronism (15~86400s) field.
  • Page 214 AutoDST file if required. The AutoDST file allows you to add or modify time zone and DST settings for your area each year. Before customizing, you need to obtain the AutoDST file. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for DST template. You can also obtain the DST template online: .
  • Page 215 Configuring Basic Features Element Type Values Description keep their daylight saving time the same) DST time type (This item is needed if optional 0: DST by Date iType you want to configure 1: DST by Week DST.) Month/Day/Hour (for iType=0) Month: 1~12 Day: 1~31 Hour: 0 (midnight)~23...
  • Page 216 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Example 1: To modify the DST settings for the existing time zone “+5 Pakistan(Islamabad)” and add DST settings for the existing time zone “+5:30 India(Calcutta)”. Example 2: Add a new time zone (+6 Paradise) with daylight saving time 30 minutes.

  • Page 217: Language

    Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default auto_dst.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the AutoDST file (AutoDST.xml). Example: auto_dst.url = tftp://192.168.1.100/AutoDST.xml During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.1.100”, and downloads the AutoDST file “AutoDST.xml”.

  • Page 218: Loading Language Packs

    IP phone. Language packs can only be loaded using configuration files. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for language packs. You can also obtain the language packs online: .
  • Page 219 Configuring Basic Features overridden by the new uploaded one. We recommend that the filename of the new language pack should not be the same as the existing one. To customize a language file: Open the desired language template file (e.g., 000.GUI.English.lang) using an ASCII editor. Modify the characters within the double quotation marks on the right of the equal sign.
  • Page 220 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure Loading language pack can only be performed using the configuration files. Specify the access URL of the phone user interface language pack. Parameter: gui_lang.url <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Delete custom LCD language packs of the phone user interface.
  • Page 221 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Deletes the specified or all custom LCD language packs of the phone user interface. Example: Delete all custom language packs of the phone user interface: gui_lang.delete = http://localhost/all Delete a custom language pack of the phone user interface (e.g., 001.GUI.Chinese_S.lang): gui_lang.delete = http://localhost/001.GUI.Chinese_S.lang Web User Interface: None...
  • Page 222 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones the same as the existing languages. To customize a language file: Open the desired language template file (e.g., 1.English.js) using an ASCII editor. Modify the characters within the double quotation marks on the right of the colon. Don’t modify the translation item on the left of the colon.
  • Page 223 Configuring Basic Features The following shows a portion of the note language pack “1.English_note.xml” for the web user interface (take SIP-T23G IP phones for example): Save the language file and place it to the provisioning server (e.g., 192.168.10.25). Specify the access URL of the note language pack of the web user interface. If you want to add a new language (e.g., Wuilan) to IP phones, prepare the language file named as “12.Wuilan.js”...
  • Page 224 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default wui_lang.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the custom language pack for the web user interface. Example: wui_lang.url = http://192.168.10.25/1.English.js...

  • Page 225: Specifying The Language To Use

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default None http://localhost/all or wui_lang.delete Blank Y.name.js http://localhost/ Description: Delete the specified or all custom web language packs and note language packs of the web user interface. Example: Delete all custom language packs of the web user interface: wui_lang.delete = http://localhost/all Delete a custom language pack of the web user interface (e.g., 11.Russian.js): wui_lang.delete = http://localhost/11.Russian.js...
  • Page 226 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =settings-preference&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=settings-preference &q=load Specify the language for the phone Phone User Interface user interface. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default lang.gui...

  • Page 227: Input Method

    Keypad input method customization allows users to customize the existing input method on IP phones. You can first customize the Yealink-supplied keypad input method file “ime.txt” or “Russian_ime.txt”, and then download it to the IP phone. The changes in the “Russian_ime.txt”...
  • Page 228 “language name_ime.txt” (e.g., German_ime.txt). Note Keypad input method customization is not applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for keypad input method file. You can also obtain the keypad input method file online: . For more http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage...
  • Page 229 Configuring Basic Features The following shows a portion of the keypad input method file “Russian_ime.txt”: To customize a keypad input method file: Open the desired keypad input method file (e.g., ime.txt) using an ASCII editor. Under the input method field (e.g., [abc]), add new characters or adjust the characters order within the double quotation marks on the right of the equal sign.
  • Page 230 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Don’t modify the item on the left of the equal sign. Save the keypad input method file and place it to the provisioning server (e.g., 192.168.10.25). Specify the access URL of the custom keypad input method file in the configuration files.
  • Page 231 Configuring Basic Features Configure the phone to display the Hebrew input method. Parameter: features.input.hebrew_enable Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default gui_input_method.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the custom keypad input method file. Example: gui_input_method.url = http://192.168.10.25/ime.txt During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server...

  • Page 232: Onscreen Keyboard Input Method Customization

    Russian onscreen keyboard by default. You can create a new language onscreen keyboard or customize the existing input method files of the onscreen keyboard. Yealink provides three types of input method files for onscreen keyboard customization. You can configure them as required.
  • Page 233 Note Onscreen keyboard input method customization is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for onscreen keyboard input method files. You can also obtain the onscreen keyboard input method files online: . For more http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage...
  • Page 234 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones numeric&symbolic input mode is almost same for each language, you can use the template file (keyboard_ime_num.xml/ keyboard_ime_num2.xml) as the input method file for multiple languages. If you want to create a new language onscreen keyboard, we recommend you customize ...
  • Page 235 Configuring Basic Features Keyboard in alphabetic input mode (lowercase): Keyboard in alphabetic input mode (uppercase): Keyboard in numeric&symbolic input mode: The following table lists meaning of each variable in the Ime input method file: Element Attribute Description Configures the Layout file that the Layout KeyboardIme keyboard will use.
  • Page 236 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Element Attribute Description Configures the display name of the input DisplayName mode when the input mode changes to lowercase. Configures the display name of the input CapitalName mode when the input mode changes to uppercase.
  • Page 237 Configuring Basic Features To customize a Keyboard_ime_german.xml file: Open the template file using an ASCII editor. Edit the corresponding string in the file. Save the file and place this file to the provisioning server. Specify the access URL of the custom Ime file in the configuration file. Customizing a Layout File When customizing a Layout file, learn the following: <KeyboardLayout>...
  • Page 238 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones The value of attributes in a line element is the default value of the corresponding attribute  in the key element. For example, if you have not configured the width attribute in the key element, the key will automatically use the value of width attribute configured in line element as the width.

  • Page 239: Specifying The Default Input Method

    Configuring Basic Features Procedure Specify the access URL of the custom onscreen keyboard input method file using the configuration files. Specify the access URL of the custom onscreen keyboard input method file. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: gui_onscreen_keyboard.url Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default...
  • Page 240 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure Specify the default input methods using the configuration files. Specify the default input method when editing contacts. Parameter: directory.edit_default_input_method <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Specify the default input method when searching for contacts.

  • Page 241: Logo Customization

    The common picture format can be *.gif/*.jpg/*.png/*.bmp. Yealink IP phones only support the *.dob format logo files. Yealink provides PictureExDemo tool to convert *.gif/*.jpg/*.png/*.bmp format to *.dob format. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for the PictureExDemo tool.

  • Page 242: Configuring The Logo Shown On The Idle Screen

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To customize a dob formatted logo file using the PictureExDemo tool: Double click the PictureExDemo.exe. Click Add button to open a *.gif/*.jpg/*.png/*.bmp file. You can repeat the second step to add multiple original picture files.
  • Page 243 Configuring Basic Features Specify the access URL of the custom logo file. Parameter: lcd_logo.url Delete all custom logo files. Parameter: lcd_logo.delete Configure the logo shown on the idle screen. Web User Interface Local Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default...
  • Page 244 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default lcd_logo.url = http://192.168.10.25/logo.dob During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the custom logo file “logo.dob”. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.lcd_logo.mode” is set to 2 (Custom logo).

  • Page 245: Softkey Layout

    Configuring Basic Features Click Upload to upload the file. Click Confirm to accept the change. The image logo screen and the idle screen are displayed alternately. Softkey Layout Softkey layout is used to customize the soft keys at the bottom of the LCD screen to best meet users’...
  • Page 246 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones =settings-softkey&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=settings-softkey&q =load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting.custom_softkey_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables custom soft keys layout feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Settings->Softkey Layout->Custom Softkey...

  • Page 247: Customizing Softkey Layout Template File

    CallFailed, CallIn, Connecting, Dialing (not applicable to SIP VP-T49G and SIP-T48G IP phones), RingBack and Talking. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for softkey layout template. You can also obtain the softkey layout template online: .
  • Page 248 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Call State Default Soft Keys Optional Soft Keys End Call Answer SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T Forward 41P/T40P/T29G/T27P/T Silence 23P/T23G/T21(P) Reject E2/T19(P) E2/CP860 IP phones: CallIn Empty Switch For SIP VP-T49G IP phones: Switch SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41...
  • Page 249 Configuring Basic Features Call State Default Soft Keys Optional Soft Keys phones) Delete Switch End Call Line Favorite (Directory) GPickup DPickup Retrieve SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41 SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T P/T40P/T29G/T27P/T23P/ 41P/T40P/T29G/T27P/T T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) 23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/CP860 IP phones: E2/T19(P) E2/CP860 IP phones: Empty RingBack Empty Empty Switch Empty For SIP VP-T49G IP...
  • Page 250 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Call State Default Soft Keys Optional Soft Keys SWAP NewCall Switch Answer Reject PriHold Park GPark RTP Status For SIP VP-T49G IP phones: Mute SWAP NewCall Switch Answer Reject PriHold Park...
  • Page 251 Configuring Basic Features Call State Default Soft Keys Optional Soft Keys Answer Reject Screenshot Record SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41 SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T P/T40P/T29G/T27P/T23P/ 41P/T40P/T29G/T27P/T T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) 23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/CP860 IP phones: E2/T19(P) E2/CP860 IP phones: Empty Empty Empty Switch Empty Answer End Call Reject For SIP VP-T49G IP phones: Held NewCall End Call...
  • Page 252 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Call State Default Soft Keys Optional Soft Keys Mute For CP860 IP phones: Split Manager Hold RTP Status Manager For CP860 IP phones: End Call Empty Switch For SIP VP-T49G IP phones:...
  • Page 253 Configuring Basic Features To customize a softkey layout template: Open the template file using an ASCII editor. For each soft key that you want to enable, move the string in the disabled soft key list to enabled soft key list in the file. For each soft key that you want to disabled, just move the string in the enabled soft key list to disabled soft key list.
  • Page 254 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server. Specify the access URL of the softkey layout template in the configuration files. Procedure Specify the access URL of the softkey layout template using configuration files.
  • Page 255 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.1.20”, and downloads the CallIn state file from the “XMLfiles” directory. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None custom_softkey_connecting.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description:...

  • Page 256: Key As Send

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the access URL of the custom file for the soft key presented on the LCD screen when in the RingBack state. Example: custom_softkey_ring_back.url = http://192.168.1.20/XMLfiles/RingBack.xml During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.1.20”, and downloads the RingBack state file from the “XMLfiles”...
  • Page 257 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Key as send can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure a send key. Parameter: features.key_as_send Configure a send tone. Parameter: features.send_key_tone <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Configure a key tone. Parameter: features.key_tone Configure send pound key. Parameter: features.send_pound_key Configure a send key.
  • Page 258 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configure a send tone or key tone. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-audio&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=features-audio&q=l Configure a send key. Phone User Interface Configure a key tone.
  • Page 259 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will play a key tone when a user presses any key on your phone keypad. Web User Interface: Features->Audio->Key Tone Phone User Interface: Menu->Settings->Basic Settings->Sound->Key Tone features.send_key_tone 0 or 1...
  • Page 260 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Key As Send. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a send tone and key tone via web user interface: Click on Features->Audio.

  • Page 261: Dial Plan

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Send Pound Key. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a send key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Key as send. Press , or the Switch soft key to select # or * from the Key as send field, or select Disabled to disable this feature.

  • Page 262: Replace Rule

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Area Code  Block Out  You need to know the following basic regular expression syntax when creating dial plan: The dot “.” can be used as a placeholder or multiple placeholders for any string.
  • Page 263 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Replace rule can be created using the configuration files or locally. Create the replace rule for the IP phone. Parameters: <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File dialplan.replace.prefix.X dialplan.replace.replace.X dialplan.replace.line_id.X Create the replace rule for the IP phone. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860:...
  • Page 264 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the alternate number to replace the entered number. Example: dialplan.replace.prefix.1 =1 and dialplan.replace.replace.1 = 254245 When you enter the number ”1” and press the send key, the number “254245” will replace the entered number “1”.
  • Page 265 Customizing Replace Rule Template File The replace rule template helps with the creation of multiple replace rules. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for replace rule template. You can also obtain the replace rule template online: . For more http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage...
  • Page 266 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Phone Model Values Description 1~6 stand for line1~line6 0 stands for all lines SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G 1~3 stand for line1~line3 0 stands for all lines SIP-T21(P) E2 1~2 stand for line1~line2 At most 100 replace rules can be added to the IP phone.

  • Page 267: Dial-Now

    Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default URL within 511 characters dialplan_replace_rule.url Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the replace rule template file. Example: dialplan_replace_rule.url = http://192.168.10.25/dialplan.xml During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.10.25”, and downloads the replace rule file “dialplan.xml”.
  • Page 268 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones phone_setting.dialnow_delay Create the dial-now rule for the IP phone. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =settings-dialnow&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=settings-dialplan&q =load&dial_page=dial-now Web User Interface Local Configure the delay time for the dial-now rule.
  • Page 269 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Settings->Dial Plan->Dial-now->Rule Phone User Interface: None dialplan.dialnow.line_id.X Blank (for Refer to the following content (X ranges from 1 to 100) all lines) Description: Configures the desired line to apply the dial-now rule. The digit 0 stands for all lines. If it is left blank, the dial-now rule will apply to all lines on the IP phone.
  • Page 270 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To create a dial-now rule via web user interface: Click on Settings->Dial Plan->Dial-now. Enter the desired value in the Rule field. Enter the desired line ID in the Account field or leave it blank.
  • Page 271 The dial-now template helps with the creation of multiple dial-now rules. After setup, place the dial-now template to the provisioning server and specify the access URL in the configuration files. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for dial-now template. You can also obtain the dial-now template online: . For more http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage...

  • Page 272: Area Code

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones dial-now rule will apply to all lines. If you want to change the dial-now rule, specify the values within double quotes. Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server.
  • Page 273 Configuring Basic Features areas in one country. When entered numbers match the predefined area code rule, the IP phone will automatically add the area code before the numbers when dialing out them. IP phones only support one area code rule. Procedure Area code rule can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
  • Page 274 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default by the parameter “dialplan.area_code.min_len” and the maximum length configured by the parameter “dialplan.area_code.max_len”. Web User Interface: Settings->Dial Plan->Area Code->Code Phone User Interface: None dialplan.area_code.min_len Integer from 1 to 15 Description: Configures the minimum length of the entered numbers.

  • Page 275: Block Out

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default dialplan.area_code.line_id = 1 Note: Multiple line IDs are separated by commas. It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860 IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Dial Plan->Area Code->Account Phone User Interface: None To configure an area code rule via web user interface: Click on Settings->Dial Plan->Area Code.
  • Page 276 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones dialplan.block_out.line_id.X Create the block out rule for the IP phone. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: Web User Interface Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =settings-blackout&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=settings-dialplan&q =load&dial_page=block-out Details of Configuration Parameters:...

  • Page 277: Hotline

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 0 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) 0 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) 0 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) Example: dialplan.block_out.line_id.1 = 1,2,3 Note: Multiple line IDs are separated by commas. It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860 IP phones.
  • Page 278 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones number. Procedure Hotline can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the hotline number. Parameter: features.hotline_number Specify the time (in seconds) the IP <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File phone waits before automatically dialing out the hotline number.
  • Page 279 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the hotline number that the IP phone automatically dials out when you lift the handset, press the Speakerphone/off-hook key or the line key. Leaving it blank disables hotline feature. Example: features.hotline_number = 1234 Note: Line key is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860 IP phones;...

  • Page 280: Off Hook Hot Line Dialing

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Enter the delay time in the Hotline Delay(0~10s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure hotline via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Hot Line. Enter the hotline number in the Hot Number field.
  • Page 281 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Off hook hot line dialing can be configured using the configuration files. Configure off hook hot line dialing feature. Parameter: account.X.auto_dial_enable <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Specify the number that the phone first dials out. Parameter: account.X.auto_dial_num Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default...

  • Page 282: Directory

    LDAP. The desired lists can be added to Directory using a directory file (favorite_setting.xml). Directory file is not applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. Customizing a Directory Template File You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for directory template. You can also obtain the directory template online: . For more http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage...
  • Page 283 Configuring Basic Features The following table lists meaning of each variable in the directory template file: Element Attribute Values Description File root element root_favorite_set localdirectory The existing directory history list (For example, networkcalllog “localdirectory” for the id_name remotedirectory local directory list). ldap Note: Do not edit this networkdirectory...
  • Page 284 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones directory template file. Parameter: directory_setting.url Configure the Directory. Navigate to: Web User Interface Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =contacts-favorite&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default directory_setting.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the directory template file.

  • Page 285: Search Source In Dialing

    Cloud phone book is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. For more information, refer to Note Yealink_SIP_VP-T49G_User_Guide. Customizing a Super Search Template File You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for super search template. You can also obtain the super search template online: . For more http://support.yealink.com/documentFront/forwardToDocumentFrontDisplayPage...
  • Page 286 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Attribute Element Values Description local_directory_search Note: Do not edit this calllog_search field. remote_directory_search ldap_search BroadSoft_directory_search For SIP VP-T49G IP phones: local_directory_search calllog_search remote_directory_search ldap_search BroadSoft_directory_search BroadSoft_UC_search Cloud_directory_search SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P /T40P/T29G/T27P/T23P/T2 3G/T21(P) E2/T19(P)
  • Page 287 Configuring Basic Features Attribute Element Values Description 1 is the highest priority, 7 is the lowest. 0/1, Enable or disable the 0: Disabled IP phone to search Enable 1: Enabled the desired directory list. Customizing a super search template: Open the template file using an ASCII editor. For each directory list that you want to configure, edit the corresponding string in the file.
  • Page 288 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=contacts-favorite&q =load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default super_search.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the super search template file.

  • Page 289: Save Call Log

    Configuring Basic Features The LCD screen displays the search results in the adjusted order. Click Confirm to accept the change. Save Call Log Call log contains call information such as remote party identification, time and date, and call duration. It can be used to redial previous outgoing calls, return incoming calls, and save contact information from call log lists to the contact directory.
  • Page 290 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=features-general&q =load Phone User Interface Configure call log feature. Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.save_call_history 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to save the call log.

  • Page 291: Call List Show Number

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Save Call Log. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure call log feature via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->History Setting. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the History Record field.
  • Page 292 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=features-general&q =load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.call_log_show_num 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to show the other party’s phone number instead of the name in the call log lists.

  • Page 293: Missed Call Log

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Call List Show Number. Click Confirm to accept the change. Missed Call Log Missed call log allows the IP phone to display the number of missed calls with an indicator icon on the idle screen, and to log missed calls in the Missed Calls list when the IP phone misses calls.
  • Page 294 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones ad&acc=0 Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default account.X.missed_calllog 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to indicate and record missed calls for account X. 0-Disabled...

  • Page 295: Local Directory

    Contacts and groups can be added either one by one or in batch using a local contact file. Yealink IP phones support both *.xml and *.csv format contact files, but only support *.xml format download for local contact file.
  • Page 296 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Element Values Description Group’s root element. group All Contacts An element of group. Group display_name Blacklist name. Format of the value: System ring tone: Auto Resource:Silent.wav An element of group. Group ring Resource:Splash.wav...
  • Page 297 Configuring Basic Features Element Values Description built-in avatar) SIP VP-T49G, SIP-T48G, Config: avatar name (the SIP-T46G and SIP-T29G IP custom avatar) phones. The following table lists valid values of line for each phone model. Phone Model Values Description -1 stands for Auto (the first registered line) VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/ -1~15 0~15 stand for line1~line16...
  • Page 298 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones For each group that you want to add, add the following string to the file. Each starts on a separate line: <group display_name="" ring=""/> For each contact that you want to add, add the following string to the file. Each starts on a separate line: <contact display_name=""...
  • Page 299 Configuring Basic Features For each contact that you want to add, add the following string to the file. Each starts on a separate line: <contact display_name="" office_number="" mobile_number="" other_number="" line="" ring="" group_id_name="" default_photo=""/> Specify the values within double quotes. For example: <group display_name="Friend"...
  • Page 300 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To package a tar formatted file using the tool 7-Zip on the Windows platform: Download and install 7-Zip on the local system. Create a folder (e.g., photo) on the local system (e.g., C:\Program Files) and place the file that will be compressed (e.g., cutom1.jpg, cutom2.png) to this folder.
  • Page 301 Configuring Basic Features Select tar from the pull-down list of Archive format. Click the OK button. A photo.tar file is generated in the directory C:\Program Files\photo. Place this file to the provisioning server (e.g., 192.168.10.25). Customizing a Local Contact File To customize a local contact file: Open the template file using an ASCII editor.
  • Page 302 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones other_number="1112" line="1,2" ring="Resource:Ring1.wav" group_id_name="Friend" default_photo="Config:cutom1.jpg"/> <contact display_name="Tom" office_number="2020" mobile_number="2021" other_number="2112" line="2" ring="Resource:Ring1.wav" group_id_name="Friend" default_photo="Config:cutom2.png"/> Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server. Specify the access URL of the custom local contact template in the configuration files.
  • Page 303 Configuring Basic Features Scenario C - Using the Custom Avatar and Custom Icon for Contact This scenario is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G and SIP-T48G IP phones. Scenario Conditions I (only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones): Provisioning server URL: tftp://192.168.10.25. ...
  • Page 304 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones <contact display_name="Tom" office_number="2020" mobile_number="2021" other_number="2112" line="2" ring="Resource:Ring1.wav" group_id_name="Friend" default_photo="Config:cutom2.png"/> Save the change and place this file to the provisioning server. Specify the access URL of the custom local contact template file in the configuration files.
  • Page 305 Configuring Basic Features The following shows the custom avatars downloaded from the provisioning server: The following shows the custom icons downloaded from the provisioning server: Procedure Local directory be configured using the configuration files or locally. Specify the access URL of the local contact file (*.xml).
  • Page 306 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Specify the access URL of a contact icon file. Parameter: local_contact.icon_image.url Specify the access URL of a TAR contact avatar file. Parameter: local_contact.image.url Specify the access URL of the compressed TAR file consisting of the avatars TAR file and contact XML file.
  • Page 307 Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default local_contact.data.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the local contact file (*.xml). Example: local_contact.data.url = http://192.168.10.25/contact.xml Web User Interface: Directory->Local Directory->Import Local Directory File Phone User Interface: None local_contact.photo.url...
  • Page 308 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None local_contact.image.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of a TAR contact avatar file. The format of the contact avatar must be *.png, *.jpg, *.bmp.
  • Page 309 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default local_contact.icon.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of a TAR contact icon file. The format of the contact icon must be *.png, *.jpg, *.bmp. The contact icon file should be compressed as a TAR file in advance and then place it to the provisioning server.
  • Page 310 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones corresponding fields. Select the desired ring tone from the pull-down list of Ring Tone. Select the desired group from the pull-down list of Group. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
  • Page 311 Configuring Basic Features Click Browse to locate a contact list file (the file format must be *.xml) from your local system. Click Import XML to import the contact list. The web user interface prompts "The original contact will be covered, Continue?". Click OK to complete importing the contact list.

  • Page 312: Live Dialpad

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones At least one item should be selected to be imported into the local directory. Click Import to complete importing the contact list. To export a contact list via web user interface: Click on Directory->Local Directory.
  • Page 313 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Live dialpad can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure live dialpad. Parameters: <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File phone_setting.predial_autodial phone_setting.inter_digit_time Configure live dialpad. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: Web User Interface Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =settings-preference&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=settings-preference &q=load...

  • Page 314: Call Waiting

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the delay time (in seconds) for the IP phone to automatically dial out the entered digits without pressing a send key. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.predial_autodial” is set to 1 (Enabled).
  • Page 315 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Call waiting and call waiting tone can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure call waiting and call waiting tone. Parameters: call_waiting.enable <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File call_waiting.tone call_waiting.on_code call_waiting.off_code Configure call waiting. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p...
  • Page 316 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default call_waiting.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables call waiting feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), a new incoming call is automatically rejected by the IP phone with a busy message while during a call.
  • Page 317 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the call waiting on code to activate the server-side call waiting feature. The IP phone will send the call waiting on code to the server when you activate call waiting feature on the IP phone.

  • Page 318: Redial Tone

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure call waiting tone via web user interface: Click on Features->Audio. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Call Waiting Tone. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 319 Configuring Basic Features SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-audio&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=features-audio&q=l Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.redial_tone Integer within 6 digits Blank Description: Configures the IP phone to continue to play the dial tone after inputting the preset numbers on the dialing screen.

  • Page 320: Ringer Device For Headset

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Enter the desired value in the Redial Tone field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Ringer Device for Headset The IP phones support either or both speaker and headset ringer devices. Ringer Device for Headset feature allows users to configure which ringer device to be used when receiving an incoming call.
  • Page 321 Configuring Basic Features 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-audio&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=features-audio&q=l Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.ringer_device.is_use_headset 0, 1 or 2 Description: Configures the ringer device for the IP phone. 0-Use Speaker 1-Use Headset 2-Use Headset & Speaker If the ringer device is set to Headset or Headset&Speaker, the headset should be connected to the IP phone and the headset mode also should be activated in advance.

  • Page 322: Auto Redial

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Click Confirm to accept the change. Auto Redial Auto redial allows IP phones to redial a busy number after the first attempt. Both the number of attempts and waiting time between redials are configurable.
  • Page 323 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to automatically redial the dialed number when the callee is temporarily unavailable. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will dial the previous dialed out number automatically when the dialed number is temporarily unavailable.

  • Page 324: Auto Answer

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To configure auto redial via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Auto Redial. Enter the waiting time in the Auto Redial Interval (1~300s) field.
  • Page 325 Configuring Basic Features Auto Answer Mute Auto answer mute allows IP phones to mute the local microphone when an incoming call is automatically answered. It is only applicable to CP860 IP phones. Auto answer is not applicable to automatically answer an IP address call. Note For SIP VP-T49G IP phones, automatically answering an IP address call works only if SIP IP direct auto answer feature/H.323 auto answer feature is enabled.
  • Page 326 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones &acc=0 Specify a period of delay time for auto answer. Configure auto answer tone. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G /T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>servlet?p=fe atures-general&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m= mod_data&p=features-general&q=loa Configure auto answer mute.
  • Page 327 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860) Note: The IP phone cannot automatically answer the incoming call during a call even if auto answer is enabled. Web User Interface: Account->Basic->Auto Answer Phone User Interface: For SIP-T42G/T41P/T40P/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2: Menu->Features->Auto Answer->Status For SIP-T46G/T29G:...
  • Page 328 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default (Enabled). Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Auto-Answer Delay(1~4s) Phone User Interface: None features.auto_answer_tone.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone to play a warning tone when an incoming call is automatically answered.
  • Page 329 Configuring Basic Features To configure auto answer and auto answer mute via web user interface (take CP860 IP phones for example): Click on Account->Basic. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Auto Answer. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Auto Answer Mute. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 330 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Enable auto answer tone. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure auto answer via phone user interface (take SIP-T23G IP phones for example): Press Menu->Features->Auto Answer.

  • Page 331: Sip Ip Direct Auto Answer

    Configuring Basic Features Press the soft key to select Enabled from the Auto Answer Mute field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. SIP IP Direct Auto Answer SIP IP direct auto answer allows IP phones to automatically answer an SIP IP call. SIP IP direct auto answer works only if allows SIP IP call is enabled.

  • Page 332: Allow Sip Ip Call

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default even if SIP IP call auto answer is enabled. It is not applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. Web User Interface: Feature->General Information->IP Direct Auto Answer Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 333 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Allow SIP IP call can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure allow SIP IP call feature. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: features.direct_ip_call_enable Configure allow SIP IP call feature. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p Local...

  • Page 334: Accept Sip Trust Server Only

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default None To configure allow SIP IP call feature via web user interface (take SIP-T23G IP phones for example): Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Allow IP Call.
  • Page 335 Configuring Basic Features 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=features-general&q =load Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default sip.trust_ctrl 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to only accept the SIP message from the SIP and outbound proxy server.

  • Page 336: Call Completion

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Accept SIP Trust Server Only. Click Confirm to accept the change. Call Completion Call completion allows users to monitor the busy party and establish a call when the busy party becomes available to receive a call.
  • Page 337 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.10.20.31:5060;branch=z9hG4bK1830418099 From: <sip:1000@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=1032948194 To: "10111" <sip:10111@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=722495580 Call-ID: 0_160090766@10.10.20.32 CSeq: 2 NOTIFY Contact: <sip:1000@10.10.20.31:5060> Content-Type: application/dialog-info+xml Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T23G 44.80.0.60 Subscription-State: active;expires=60 Event: dialog Content-Length: <?xml version="1.0"?> <dialog-info xmlns="urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:dialog-info" version="1" state="full" entity="sip:1000@10.2.1.48:5060"> <dialog id="65626" call-id="0_3138198645@10.10.20.31" local-tag="2331766736" remote-tag="1786911541"...
  • Page 338 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Call-ID: 0_2584152566@10.10.20.32 CSeq: 5 NOTIFY Contact: <sip:1000@10.10.20.31:5060> Content-Type: application/dialog-info+xml Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T23G 44.80.0.60 Subscription-State: active;expires=48 Event: dialog Content-Length: <?xml version="1.0"?> <dialog-info xmlns="urn:ietf:params:xml:ns:dialog-info" version="4" state="partial" entity="sip:1000@10.2.1.48:5060"> <dialog id="65644"> <state>terminated</state> </dialog>...
  • Page 339 Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.call_completion_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables call completion feature. If a user places a call and the callee is temporarily unavailable to answer the call, call completion feature allows notifying the user when the callee becomes available to receive a call.

  • Page 340: Anonymous Call

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Call Completion field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. Anonymous Call Anonymous call allows the caller to conceal the identity information displayed on the callee’s screen.
  • Page 341 Configuring Basic Features SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/ T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=acc ount-basic&q=load&acc=0 For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=m od_data&p=account-basic&q=load&ac Phone User Interface Configure anonymous call. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.anonymous_call 0 or 1 Description: Triggers the anonymous call feature to on or off for SIP account X. 0-Off 1-On If it is set to 1 (On), the IP phone will block its identity from showing up to the callee when...
  • Page 342 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default server-side anonymous call feature for SIP account X. 0-Off Code 1-On Code If it is set to 0 (Off Code), the IP phone will send anonymous off code to the server when you deactivate the anonymous call feature.
  • Page 343 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Features->Anonymous Call->On Code account.X.anonymous_call_offcode String within 32 characters Blank Description: Configures the anonymous call off code to deactivate the server-side anonymous call feature for SIP account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G)

  • Page 344: Anonymous Call Rejection

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones (Optional.) Enter the anonymous call off code in the Off Code field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the anonymous call via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Anonymous Call. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Line ID field.
  • Page 345 Configuring Basic Features UPDATE, MESSAGE User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T23G 44.80.0.60 Allow-Events: talk, hold, conference, refer, check-sync Content-Length: 0 The anonymous call rejection on code and anonymous call rejection off code configured on IP phones are used to activate/deactivate the server-side anonymous call rejection feature. They may vary on different servers.
  • Page 346 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-On If it is set to 1 (On), the IP phone will automatically reject incoming calls from users enabled anonymous call feature. The anonymous user’s phone LCD screen presents “Anonymity Disallowed”.
  • Page 347 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the anonymous call rejection on code to activate the server-side anonymous call rejection feature for SIP account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2)
  • Page 348 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Features->Anonymous Call->Reject Off Code To configure anonymous call rejection via web user interface: Click on Account->Basic. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Local Anonymous Rejection.

  • Page 349: Do Not Disturb (Dnd)

    Configuring Basic Features Do Not Disturb (DND) DND allows IP phones to ignore incoming calls. DND feature can be configured on a phone or a per-line basis depending on the DND mode. Two DND modes: Phone (default): DND feature is effective for the IP phone. ...
  • Page 350 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Specify the authorized numbers when DND is enabled. Parameters: features.dnd.emergency_enable features.dnd.emergency_authorized_n umber Specify the return code and the reason of the SIP response message when DND is enabled. Parameter: features.dnd_refuse_code Assign a DND key.
  • Page 351 Configuring Basic Features Specify the authorized numbers when DND is enabled. Specify the return code and the reason of the SIP response message when DND is enabled. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29 G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=f eatures-general&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m= mod_data&p=features-general&q=lo Assign a DND key.
  • Page 352 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones If it is set to 0 (Phone), DND feature is effective for the IP phone. If it is set to 1 (Custom), you can configure DND feature for each account. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860 IP phones.
  • Page 353 If it is set to 1 (On), the IP phone will reject incoming calls on all accounts. Note: For Yealink IP phones (except SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860), it works only if the value of the parameter “features.dnd_model” is set to 0 (Phone).
  • Page 354 DND on code to the server when you activate DND feature on the IP phone. Example: features.dnd.on_code = *71 Note: For Yealink IP phones (except SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860), it works only if the value of the parameter “features.dnd_mode” is set to 0 (Phone). Web User Interface: Features->Forward&DND->DND->DND On Code...
  • Page 355 Configuring Basic Features Features->Forward&DND->DND->DND Emergency Phone User Interface: None String within 511 features.dnd.emergency_authorized_number Blank characters Description: Configures the authorized numbers the IP phone can receive incoming calls from even if DND feature is enabled. Multiple numbers are separated by commas. Example: features.dnd.emergency_authorized_number = 123,124 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.dnd.emergency_enable”...
  • Page 356 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameter Permitted Values Default linekey.X.type/ Refer to the following programablekey.X.type/ content expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Description: Configures a DSS key as a DND key on the IP phone. The digit 5 stands for the key type DND.
  • Page 357 Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default For SIP-T41P IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-15 is 0. For SIP-T27P IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-21 is 0. For SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: The default value is 15.
  • Page 358 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=8, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status).
  • Page 359 Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu). When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 360 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys: X ranges from 1 to 4.
  • Page 361 Configuring Basic Features (Optional.) Enter the DND off code in the DND Off Code field. If you mark the Custom radio box: Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Mark the desired radio box in the DND Status field. (Optional.) Enter the DND on code in the DND On Code field.
  • Page 362 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones (Optional.) Enter the DND off code in the DND Off Code field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To specify the authorized numbers when DND is enabled via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information.
  • Page 363 Configuring Basic Features Multiple numbers are separated by commas. Click Confirm to accept the change. To specify the return code and the reason when DND is enabled via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Return Code When DND.

  • Page 364: Busy Tone Delay

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a DND key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys. Select the desired DSS key. Press , or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field.
  • Page 365 Configuring Basic Features =features-general&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=features-general&q =load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.busy_tone_delay 0, 3 or 5 Description: Configures the duration time (in seconds) for the busy tone. When one party releases the call, a busy tone is audible to the other party indicating that the call connection breaks.

  • Page 366: Return Code When Refuse

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones 3． Click Confirm to accept the change. Return Code When Refuse Return code when refuse defines the return code and reason of the SIP response message for the refused call. The caller’s phone LCD screen displays the reason according to the received return code.
  • Page 367 Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.normal_refuse_code 404, 480, 486 or 603 Description: Configures a return code and reason of SIP response messages when the IP phone rejects an incoming call. A specific reason is displayed on the caller’s phone LCD screen. 404-Not Found 480-Temporarily Unavailable 486-Busy Here...

  • Page 368: Early Media

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Early Media Early media refers to media (e.g., audio and video) played to the caller before a SIP call is actually established. Current implementation supports early media through the 183 message.

  • Page 369: Use Outbound Proxy In Dialog

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default message. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will resume and play the local ringback tone upon a subsequent 180 message received. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->180 Ring Workaround Phone User Interface: None To configure 180 ring workaround via web user interface:...
  • Page 370 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure Use outbound proxy in dialog can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Specify whether to use outbound proxy in a dialog. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: sip.use_out_bound_in_dialog Specify whether to use outbound proxy in a dialog.

  • Page 371: Sip Session Timer

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None To configure use outbound proxy in dialog via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Use Outbound Proxy In Dialog. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 372 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones T1 (0.5) will continue until the retransmitting time reaches the Timer T2 (4). The total registration request retry time will be less than 64 times of T1 (64 * 0.5 = 32). The re-transmitting interval in sequence is: 0.5s, 1s, 2s, 4s, 4s, 4s, 4s, 4s, 4s and 4s.
  • Page 373 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None sip.timer_t2 Float from 2 to 40 Description: Configures the SIP session timer T2 (in seconds). Timer T2 represents the maximum retransmitting time of any SIP request message. Web User Interface: Settings->SIP->SIP Session Timer T2 (2~40s) Phone User Interface: None...

  • Page 374: Session Timer

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Enter the desired value in the SIP Session Timer T4 (2.5~60s) field. The default value is 5. Click Confirm to accept the change. Session Timer Session timer allows a periodic refresh of SIP sessions through an UPDATE request, to determine whether a SIP session is still active.
  • Page 375 Configuring Basic Features Supported: timer Content-Length: 0 Procedure Session timer can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure session timer. Parameters: <MAC>.cfg account.X.session_timer.enable Configuration File account.X.session_timer.expires account.X.session_timer.refresher Configure session timer. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29 G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: Web User Interface Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=a ccount-adv&q=load&acc=0...
  • Page 376 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860) Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Session Timer Phone User Interface: None Integer from 30 account.X.session_timer.expires...

  • Page 377: Call Hold

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860) Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.session_timer.enable”...
  • Page 378 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones IP phones send an INVITE request with HOLD SDP to request remote parties to stop sending media and to inform them that they are being held. IP phones support two call hold methods, one is RFC 3264, which sets the “a”...
  • Page 379 Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.play_hold_tone.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to play a warning tone when there is a call on hold. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Play Hold Tone Phone User Interface: None features.play_hold_tone.delay...
  • Page 380 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Features->General Information->RFC 2543 Hold Phone User Interface: None To configure call hold tone and call hold tone delay via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Play Hold Tone.

  • Page 381: Music On Hold

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of RFC 2543 Hold. Click Confirm to accept the change. Music on Hold Music on Hold (MoH) is the business practice of playing recorded music to fill the silence that would be heard by the party who has been placed on hold.
  • Page 382 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones account.X.music_on_hold_type Configure music on hold for SIP account. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: Web User Interface Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =account-adv&q=load&acc=0 For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=account-adv&q=loa d&acc=0 Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters...
  • Page 383 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.music_on_hold_type 0 or 1 Description: Configures the way to process Music On Hold when placing an active call on hold for SIP account X. 0-Calling the Music On Hold server before holding 1-Calling the Music On Hold server after holding X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P)

  • Page 384: Call Forward

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Enter the SIP URI (e.g., sip:moh@sip.com) in the Music Server URI field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Call Forward Call forward allows users to redirect an incoming call to a third party. IP phones redirect an incoming INVITE message by responding with a 302 Moved Temporarily message, which contains a Contact header with a new URI that should be tried.
  • Page 385 Configuring Basic Features Diversion/History-Info IP phones support the redirected call information sent by the SIP server with Diversion header, per draft-levy-sip-diversion-08, or History-info header, per RFC 4244. The Diversion/History-info header is used to inform the IP phone of a call’s history. For example, when a phone has been set to enable call forward, the Diversion/History-info header allows the receiving phone to indicate who the call was from, and from which phone number it was forwarded.
  • Page 386 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Specify the authorized numbers when call forward is enabled. Parameters: features.forward.emergency.enable features.forward.emergency.authori zed_number Configure the call forward mode. Parameter: features.fwd_mode Configure call forward in phone mode. Parameters: forward.always.enable forward.always.target forward.always.on_code forward.always.off_code <y0000000000xx>.cfg...
  • Page 387 Configuring Basic Features Specify the authorized numbers when call forward is enabled. Configure call forward. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T 29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-forward&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? m=mod_data&p=features-forward &q=load Web User Interface Configure diversion/history-info Local feature. Configure forward international. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T 29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860:...
  • Page 388 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-Custom If it is set to 0 (Phone), call forward feature is effective for the IP phone. If it is set to 1 (Custom), you can configure call forward feature for each account.
  • Page 389 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd_mode” is set to 1 (Custom). It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860 IP phones. Example: account.1.always_fwd.target = 1003 Web User Interface:...
  • Page 390 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 391 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the destination number of the busy forward for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) Example:...
  • Page 392 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default String within 32 account.X.busy_fwd.off_code Blank characters Description: Configures the busy forward off code to deactivate the server-side busy forward feature for account X. The IP phone will send the busy forward off code to the server when you deactivate busy forward feature for account X on the IP phone.
  • Page 393 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Features->Forward&DND->Forward->No Answer Forward->On/Off Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Call Forward->No Answer Forward->No Answer Forward String within 32 account.X.timeout_fwd.target Blank characters Description: Configures the destination number of the no answer forward for account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 394 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Call Forward->No Answer Forward->After Ring Time String within 32 account.X.timeout_fwd.on_code Blank characters Description: Configures the no answer forward on code to activate the server-side no answer forward feature for account X.
  • Page 395 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd_mode” is set to 1 (Custom). It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860 IP phones. Web User Interface: Features->Forward&DND->Forward->No Answer Forward ->Off Code Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Call Forward->No Answer Forward->Off Code features.forward.emergency.enable...
  • Page 396 If it is set to 1 (On), incoming calls are forwarded to the destination number immediately. Note: For Yealink IP phones (except SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860), it works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd_mode” is set to 0 (Phone).
  • Page 397 IP phone. Example: forward.always.off_code = *73 Note: For Yealink IP phones (except SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860), it works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd_mode” is set to 0 (Phone). Web User Interface: Features->Forward&DND->Forward->Always Forward->Off Code Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Call Forward->Always Forward->Off Code...
  • Page 398 Configures the destination number of the busy forward for the IP phone. Example: forward.busy.target = 3602 Note: For Yealink IP phones (except SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860), it works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd_mode” is set to 0 (Phone). Web User Interface: Features->Forward&DND->Forward->Busy Forward->Target...
  • Page 399 If it is set to 1 (On), incoming calls are forwarded to the destination number after a period of ring time. Note: For Yealink IP phones (except SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860), it works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd_mode” is set to 0 (Phone).
  • Page 400 Configures ring times (N) to wait before forwarding incoming calls. Incoming calls will be forwarded when not answered after N*6 seconds. Note: For Yealink IP phones (except SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860), it works only if the value of the parameter “features.fwd_mode” is set to 0 (Phone).
  • Page 401 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Features->Forward&DND->Forward->No Answer Forward->Off Code Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Call Forward->No Answer Forward->Off Code features.fwd_diversion_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to present the diversion information when an incoming call is forwarded to your IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface:...
  • Page 402 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Multiple numbers are separated by commas. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure call forward via web user interface: Click on Features->Forward&DND. In the Forward block, mark the desired radio box in the Mode field.
  • Page 403 Configuring Basic Features Select the ring time to wait before forwarding from the pull-down list of After Ring Time(0~120s) (only for the no answer forward). Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure Diversion/History-Info feature via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Diversion/History-Info.
  • Page 404 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Fwd International. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure call forward in phone mode via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Call Forward.
  • Page 405 Configuring Basic Features On Code and Off Code field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the ring time to wait before forwarding from the After Ring Time field. The default ring time is 12 seconds. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. To configure call forward in custom mode via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Call Forward.

  • Page 406: Call Transfer

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones If you select No Answer Forward, you can configure it for a specific account. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the No Answer Forward field.
  • Page 407 Configuring Basic Features calls) on the destination party’s phone LCD screen. Procedure Call transfer can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Specify whether to complete the transfer through on-hook. Parameters: transfer.blind_tran_on_hook_enable transfer.on_hook_trans_enable <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Configure semi-attended transfer feature.
  • Page 408 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Features->Transfer->Blind Transfer On Hook Phone User Interface: None transfer.on_hook_trans_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to complete the semi-attended/attended transfer through on-hook besides pressing the Tran/Transfer soft key or TRAN/TRANSFER key.

  • Page 409: Local Conference

    Click Confirm to accept the change. Local Conference Local conference requires a host phone to process the audio of all parties. Yealink IP phones support up to 3 parties (including yourself) in a local conference call. For SIP VP-T49G IP phones, you can create up to three-way video conference call and five-way audio and video mixing conference.
  • Page 410 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default account.X.conf_type 0 or 2 Description: Configures the network conference type for SIP account X. 0-Local Conference 2-Network Conference If it is set to 0 (Local Conference), conferences are set up on the IP phone locally.

  • Page 411: Network Conference

    Configuring Basic Features Select Locol Conference from the pull-down list of Conference Type. Click Confirm to accept the change. Network Conference Network conference, also known as centralized conference, provides users with flexibility of call with multiple participants (more than three). IP phones implement network conference using the REFER method specified in RFC 4579.
  • Page 412 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=account-adv&q=loa d&acc=0 Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.conf_type 0 or 2 Description: Configures the network conference type for SIP account X. 0-Local Conference 2-Network Conference If it is set to 0 (Local Conference), conferences are set up on the IP phone locally.

  • Page 413: Feature Key Synchronization

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default account.1.conf_uri = conference@example.com Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account.X.conf_type” is set to 2 (Network Conference). Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Conference URI Phone User Interface: None To configure the network conference via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced.
  • Page 414 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Call Forwarding Busy (CFB)  Call Forwarding No Answer (CFNA)  If feature key synchronization is enabled, a user changes the status of one of these features on the server, and then the server notifies the phone of synchronizing the status. Conversely, if the user changes the feature status on the phone, the IP phone notifies the server of synchronizing the status.

  • Page 415: Transfer On Conference Hang Up

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default None To configure feature key synchronization via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Feature Key Synchronization. Click Confirm to accept the change. Transfer on Conference Hang Up For a conference call, all parties drop the call when the conference initiator drops the conference call.
  • Page 416 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-transfer&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=features-transfer&q =load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default transfer.tran_others_after_conf_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to transfer the local conference call to the other two parties after the conference initiator drops the local conference call.

  • Page 417: Transfer Mode Via Dsskey

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Transfer on Conference Hang up. Click Confirm to accept the change. Transfer Mode via Dsskey Transfer mode via dsskey enables IP phones to handle the current call differently via the DSS key. IP phones support three transfer modes: New Call, Blind Transfer and Attended Transfer.
  • Page 418 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-transfer&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=features-transfer&q =load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default transfer.dsskey_deal_type 0, 1 or 2 Description: Configures the transfer mode when user presses the DSS key during an active call.

  • Page 419: Allow Trans Exist Call

    Configuring Basic Features Click Confirm to accept the change. Allow Trans Exist Call Allow trans exist call feature allows users to select transfer-to party’s call during multiple calls. It is convenient to transfer the active call to another existing call. It is not applicable to SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G IP phones.

  • Page 420: Directed Call Pickup

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default None To configure allow trans exist call via web user interface: Click on Feature->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Allow Trans Exist Call.
  • Page 421 Configuring Basic Features Configure directed call pickup features on a phone basis. Parameters: features.pickup.direct_pickup_enabl features.pickup.direct_pickup_code Assign a directed call pickup key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ programablekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.line/ programablekey.X.line/ <y0000000000xx>.cfg expansion_module.X.key.Y.line linekey.X.value/ programablekey.X.value/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.value linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Assign a directed call pickup key. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P)
  • Page 422 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones =account-adv&q=load&acc=0 For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=account-adv&q=loa d&acc=0 Configure directed call pickup feature on a phone basis. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-callpickup&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=features-callpickup &q=load Phone User Interface Assign a directed call pickup key.
  • Page 423 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Account->Advanced->Directed Call Pickup Code Phone User Interface: None features.pickup.direct_pickup_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the DPickup soft key when the IP phone is on the dialing screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface:...
  • Page 424 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default linekey.X.type/ Refer to the following programablekey.X.type/ content expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Description: Configures a DSS key as a directed call pickup key on the IP phone.
  • Page 425 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default For SIP-T41P IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-15 is 0. For SIP-T27P IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-21 is 0. For SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: The default value is 15.
  • Page 426 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=8, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status).
  • Page 427 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu). When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 428 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys:...
  • Page 429 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys:...
  • Page 430 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default For programable keys: X ranges from 1 to 4. For ext keys: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).
  • Page 431 Configuring Basic Features Enter the directed call pickup code in the Directed Call Pickup Code field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure directed call pickup feature on a phone basis via web user interface: Click on Features->Call Pickup. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Directed Call Pickup.

  • Page 432: Group Call Pickup

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Press , or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select DPickup from the Key Type field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Account ID field.
  • Page 433 Configuring Basic Features Assign a group call pickup key. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T2 7P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=dssk ey&q=load&model=0 For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=mod _data&p=dsskey&q=load Configure the group call pickup code for SIP account. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T2 7P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=acco Local unt-adv&q=load&acc=0...
  • Page 434 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the GPickup soft key when the IP phone is on the dialing screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Features->Call Pickup->Group Call Pickup...
  • Page 435 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Features->Call Pickup->Group Call Pickup Code Phone User Interface: None Group Call Pickup Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 987. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values...
  • Page 436 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: linekey.2.type = 23 Default: For SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-29 is 0.
  • Page 437 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=12, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For SIP-T42G/T41P/T40P IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory).
  • Page 438 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=8, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 439 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Refer to the 1-16 for lines 1-16, linekey.X.line/ programablekey.X.line/ following 1 for programable expansion_module.X.key.Y.line content Description: Configures the desired line to apply the group call pickup key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P)
  • Page 440 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: DSSKey->Line Key/ Programable Key->Line Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Account ID linekey.X.value/ programablekey.X.value/ String within 99 Blank expansion_module.X.key.Y.value characters Description: Configures the group call pickup feature code.
  • Page 441 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 442 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To configure the group call pickup code for SIP account via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Enter the group call pickup code in the Group Call Pickup Code field.

  • Page 443: Dialog Info Call Pickup

    Configuring Basic Features To configure a group pickup key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys. Select the desired DSS key. Press , or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select GPickup from the Key Type field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired line from the Account ID field.
  • Page 444 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones </dialog> </dialog-info> Example of the Replaces carried in INVITE message: Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.10.20.18:5060;branch=z9hG4bK2026058891 From: "1010" <sip:1010@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=826048502 To: <sip:1058@10.2.1.48:5060> Call-ID: 0_572446084@10.10.20.18 CSeq: 1 INVITE Contact: <sip:1010@10.10.20.18:5060> Content-Type: application/sdp Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH,...
  • Page 445 Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 account.X.dialoginfo_callpickup Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to pick up a call according to the SIP header of dialog-info for SIP account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), call pickup is implemented through SIP signals.

  • Page 446: Recent Call In Dialing

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Dialog Info Call Pickup. Click Confirm to accept the change. Recent Call In Dialing Recent call in dialing feature allows users to view the placed calls list when the phone is on the dialing screen.
  • Page 447 Configuring Basic Features Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default Refer to 0 or 1 super_search.recent_call following content Description: Enables or disables recent call in dialing feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), you can see the placed calls list when the IP phone is on the dialing screen.

  • Page 448: Recall

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Recent Call In Dialing. Click Confirm to accept the change. ReCall ReCall, also known as last call return, allows users to place a call back to the last caller. Recall is implemented on IP phones using a recall key.
  • Page 449 Configuring Basic Features http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =dsskey&q=load&model=0 For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=dsskey&q=load Phone User Interface Assign a recall key. ReCall Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 987. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default...
  • Page 450 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default linekey.1.type = 7 Default: For SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-29 is 0.
  • Page 451 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=13, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For SIP-T42G/T41P/T40P IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND).
  • Page 452 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=8, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status).
  • Page 453 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default linekey.X.label/ String within 99 programablekey.X.label/ Blank characters expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Description: (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P)

  • Page 454: Call Number Filter

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired DSS key. Press , or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select ReCall from the Key Type field.

  • Page 455: Call Park

    Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: features.call_num_filter = ,-12 If you dial 3-61, the IP phone will filter the characters – and 1, and then dial out 36. Note: If it is left blank, the IP phone will not automatically filter any characters when dialing. If you want to filter just a space, you have to set the value to “...
  • Page 456 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones from the desired extension or local extension through dialing the park retrieve code. Transfer mode: Call park feature via Transfer mode allows users to park an active call to  the shared parking lot through performing a blind transfer to a call park shared number (call park code), and retrieve the parked call from the shared parking lot through dialing the park retrieve code.
  • Page 457 Configuring Basic Features Assign a call park key. Assign a retrieve park key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.line/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.line linekey.X.value/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.value linekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Configure the call park feature. Configure the call park code. Configure the park retrieve code. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p...
  • Page 458 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Assign a call park key. Phone User Interface Assign a retrieve park key. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.call_park.park_mode 1 or 2 Description: Configures the call park mode.
  • Page 459 Configuring Basic Features Phone User Interface: None String within 32 features.call_park.park_retrieve_code Blank characters Description: Configures the park retrieve code for the Retrieve soft key. This park retrieve code/park retrieval number will also apply to the retrieve park key. Note: It is not applicable to SIP VP-T49G/CP860 IP phones. Web User Interface: Features->Call Pickup->Park Retrieve Code Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 460 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Default: For SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-29 is 0.
  • Page 461 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Permitted Values: 1 to 16, 150 (for SIP VP-T49G) 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) 1-Line 1 2-Line 2 …...
  • Page 462 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: DSSKey->Line key->Value Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Value linekey.X.label/ String within 99 Blank expansion_module.X.key.Y.label characters Description: (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key.
  • Page 463 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default The digit 56 stands for the key type Retrieve Park. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2)
  • Page 464 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the desired line to apply the call park key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G)
  • Page 465 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For ext keys:...
  • Page 466 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To configure call park feature via web user interface: Click on Features->Call Pickup. Select the desired call park mode from the pull-down list of Call Park Mode. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Call Park.

  • Page 467: Calling Line Identification Presentation

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired line from the pull-down list of Line. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a call park key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys. Select the desired DSS key. Press , or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field. Press , or the Switch soft key to select Call Park from the Key Type field.
  • Page 468 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones The following sessions show the enhancements of calling line identification presentation according to the calling line identification source configured on the IP phones. Caller ID source = FROM The IP phone checks Privacy: id header preferentially, if there is a Privacy: id in the INVITE request, the calling line identification information will be hidden and the IP phone LCD screen presents anonymous.
  • Page 469 If there is not P-Asserted-Identity in the INVITE request, the IP phone presents the caller identification derived from the FROM header. Calling and Connected For more information on calling line identification presentation, refer to Line Identification Presentation on Yealink IP Phones. Procedure CLIP can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
  • Page 470 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Specify whether to process the P-Preferred-Identity (PPI) header for caller identity presentation. Parameter: account.X.cid_source_ppi Configure the presentation of the caller identity. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/ T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: Web User Interface Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?
  • Page 471 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860) Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Caller ID Source Phone User Interface: None account.X.cid_source_privacy 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to process Privacy header field in the SIP message for SIP account X.

  • Page 472: Connected Line Identification Presentation

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None To configure the presentation of the caller identity via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
  • Page 473 Connected Line Identification source = Dialed digits Yealink IP phones present the connected line identification according to the dialed digits. Connected Line Identification source = RFC4916 Yealink IP phones support to present the connected line identification from UPDATE message following the RFC 4916.
  • Page 474 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the presentation of the callee’s identity for SIP account X. 0-PAI-RPID 1-Dialed Digits 2-RFC 4916 When the RFC 4916 is enabled on the IP phone, the caller sends the SIP request message which contains the from-change tag in the Supported header.

  • Page 475: Dtmf

    Configuring Basic Features DTMF DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-frequency), better known as touch-tone, is used for telecommunication signaling over analog telephone lines in the voice-frequency band. DTMF is the signal sent from the IP phone to the network, which is generated when pressing the IP phone’s keypad during a call.
  • Page 476 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones codec as your voice and is audible to conversation partners. SIP INFO DTMF digits are transmitted by the SIP INFO messages when the voice stream is established after a successful SIP 200 OK-ACK message sequence. The SIP INFO message is sent along the signaling path of the call.
  • Page 477 Configuring Basic Features Configure the method of transmitting DTMF digits and the payload type for account X. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/ T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? p=account-adv&q=load&acc=0 For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? m=mod_data&p=account-adv&q =load&acc=0 Web User Interface Local Configure the number of times for the IP phone to send the end RTP Event packet.
  • Page 478 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 3-RFC2833 + SIP INFO If it is set to 0 (INBAND), DTMF digits are transmitted in the voice band. If it is set to 1 (RFC 2833), DTMF digits are transmitted by RTP Events compliant to RFC 2833.
  • Page 479 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the DTMF info type for SIP account X. 1-DTMF-Relay 2-DTMF 3-Telephone-Event X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860)
  • Page 480 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None Phone User Interface: None Integer from -33 features.dtmf.volume to 0 Description: Configures the frequency level of DTMF digits (in db). Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 481: Suppress Dtmf Display

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value (1-3) from the pull-down list of DTMF Repetition. Click Confirm to accept the change. Suppress DTMF Display Suppress DTMF display allows IP phones to suppress the display of DTMF digits during an active call.
  • Page 482 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m= mod_data&p=features-general&q=loa Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.dtmf.hide 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to suppress the display of DTMF digits during an active call.

  • Page 483: Transfer Via Dtmf

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Suppress DTMF Display Delay. Click Confirm to accept the change. Transfer via DTMF Call transfer is implemented via DTMF on some traditional servers. The IP phone sends specified DTMF digits to the server for transferring calls to third parties.
  • Page 484 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones &q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.dtmf.replace_tran 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to send DTMF sequences for transfer function when pressing the Tran/Transfer soft key or TRAN/TRANSFER key.

  • Page 485: Play Local Dtmf Tone

    Configuring Basic Features Enter the specified DTMF digits in the Tran Send DTMF field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Play Local DTMF Tone Play local DTMF tone allows IP phones to play a local DTMF tone during an active call. If this feature is enabled, you can hear the DTMF tone when pressing the IP phone’s keypad during a call.
  • Page 486 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones =mod_data&p=features-general&q =load Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.play_local_dtmf_tone_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to play a local DTMF tone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), you can hear the DTMF tone when pressing the IP phone’s keypad during a call.

  • Page 487: Allow Mute

    Configuring Basic Features Allow Mute You can mute the microphone of the active audio device during an active call, and then the other party cannot hear you. If allow mute feature is disabled, you cannot mute an active call. Procedure Allow mute can be configured using the configuration files or locally.

  • Page 488: Intercom

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Allow Mute. Click Confirm to accept the change. Intercom Intercom allows establishing an audio conversation directly. The IP phone can answer intercom calls automatically.

  • Page 489: Intercom Key

    Configuring Basic Features programablekey.X.value/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.value linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Assign an intercom key. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/CP860: Web User Interface Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =dsskey&q=load&model=0 For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=dsskey&q=load Phone User Interface Assign an intercom key. Intercom Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 987.
  • Page 490 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default For programable keys: X=1-6, 9, 13 (for CP860) For ext keys: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).
  • Page 491 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default DSSKey->Line key/Programable Key->Type Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Type linekey.X.line/ Refer to the following 1-16 for lines 1-16 expansion_module.X.key.Y.line content Description: Configures the desired line to apply the intercom key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P)
  • Page 492 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default linekey.X.value/ String within 99 programablekey.X.value/ Blank characters expansion_module.X.key.Y.value Description: Configures the intercom number. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G)
  • Page 493 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys: X ranges from 1 to 4. For ext keys: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured). Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.

  • Page 494: Incoming Intercom Calls

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Incoming Intercom Calls The IP phone can process incoming calls differently depending on settings. There are four configuration options for incoming intercom calls: Accept Intercom Accept Intercom allows the IP phone to answer an incoming intercom call.
  • Page 495 Configuring Basic Features q=load Configure incoming intercom call Phone User Interface feature. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.intercom.allow 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to answer an incoming intercom call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone will reject incoming intercom calls and sends a busy signal to the caller.
  • Page 496 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Enables or disables the IP phone to play a warning tone when answering an intercom call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.intercom.allow” is set to 1 (Enabled).

  • Page 497: Call Timeout

    Configuring Basic Features Select the desired values from the pull-down lists of Accept Intercom, Intercom Mute, Intercom Tone and Intercom Barge. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure intercom via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->Intercom. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired values from the Accept Intercom, Intercom Mute, Intercom Tone and Intercom Barge fields.

  • Page 498: Ringing Timeout

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None Ringing Timeout Ringing timeout defines a specific period of time within which the IP phone will stop ringing if the call is not answered.
  • Page 499 Contact: <sip:1010@10.3.20.6:5060> Content-Type: application/sdp Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T23G 44.80.0.60 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync Content-Length: 300 Procedure Send user=phone can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
  • Page 500 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 account.X.enable_user_equal_phone Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to add “user=phone” to the SIP header of the INVITE message for SIP account X.

  • Page 501: Sip Send Mac

    From: "11" <sip:11@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=2788360609 To: "11" <sip:11@10.2.1.48:5060> Call-ID: 1_1863786852@10.3.20.14 CSeq: 2 REGISTER Contact: <sip:11@10.3.20.14:5060;line=cc75882e976e208> Allow: INVITE, INFO, PRACK, ACK, BYE, CANCEL, OPTIONS, NOTIFY, REGISTER, SUBSCRIBE, REFER, PUBLISH, UPDATE, MESSAGE Max-Forwards: 70 User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T23G 44.80.0.60 Expires: 0 Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync Mac: 00:15:65:74:b1:50...
  • Page 502 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Content-Length: 0 Procedure SIP send MAC can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure SIP send MAC for SIP account. <MAC>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: account.X.register_mac Configure SIP send MAC for SIP account.

  • Page 503: Sip Send Line

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->SIP Send MAC Phone User Interface: None To configure SIP send MAC feature via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of SIP Send MAC.
  • Page 504 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Phone Model Line Number Description SIP-T21(P) E2 0~1 stand for line1~line2 SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860 0 stand for line1 Example of a SIP REGISTER message: REGISTER sip:10.2.1.48:5060 SIP/2.0 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.3.20.14:5060;branch=z9hG4bK3990593443 From: "11" <sip:11@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=255071842 To: "11"...
  • Page 505 Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 account.X.register_line Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to add line number to the SIP header of the REGISTER message for SIP account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G)

  • Page 506: Reserve # In User Name

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of SIP Send Line. Click Confirm to accept the change. Reserve # in User Name Reserve # in User Name feature allows IP phones to reserve “#” in user name. When Reserve # in User Name feature is disabled, “#”...
  • Page 507 Configuring Basic Features Configure reserve # in user name. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: sip.use_23_as_pound Configure reserve # in user name. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: Web User Interface Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=features-general&q =load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default...

  • Page 508: Password Dial

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Reserve # in User Name. Click Confirm to accept the change. Password Dial Password dial feature allows the callee number to be partly displayed on the IP phone when placing a call.
  • Page 509 Configuring Basic Features Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 features.password_dial.enable Description: Enables or disables password dial feature for the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Features->General Information->PswDial Phone User Interface: None String within 32 Blank features.password_dial.prefix characters...

  • Page 510: Unregister When Reboot

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To configure password dial feature via web user interface: Click on Features->General Information. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of PswDial. Enter the prefix of password dial in the PswPrefix field.
  • Page 511 Configuring Basic Features For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=account-adv&q=loa d&acc=0 Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default 0 or 1 account.X.unregister_on_reboot Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to unregister first before re-registering account X when finishing a reboot. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G)

  • Page 512: 100 Reliable Retransmission

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Unregister When Reboot. Click Confirm to accept the change. 100 Reliable Retransmission As described in 3262, 100rel tag is for reliability of provisional responses. When present in a Supported header, it indicates that the IP phone can send or receive reliable provisional responses.
  • Page 513 Configuring Basic Features Supported: 100rel Allow-Events: talk,hold,conference,refer,check-sync Content-Length: Procedure 100 Reliable Retransmission can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the 100 reliable retransmission feature. <MAC>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: account.X.100rel_enable Configure the 100 reliable retransmission feature. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860:...

  • Page 514: Reboot In Talking

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860) Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Retransmission Phone User Interface: None To configure 100 reliable retransmission via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced.
  • Page 515 Configuring Basic Features Procedure Reboot in talking can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure reboot in talking. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: features.reboot_in_talk_enable Configure reboot in talking. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: Web User Interface Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-general&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m...

  • Page 516: Answer By Hand

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Reboot in Talking field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after a reboot.

  • Page 517: Bandwidth

    Configuring Basic Features Parameter Permitted Values Default pressing the Speakerphone key or pressing the HEADSET key directly. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), you need to press the corresponding line key, the Answer soft key or the OK key to answer an incoming call after picking up the handset, pressing the Speakerphone key or pressing the HEADSET key.
  • Page 518 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default 0, 256, 384, 512, 640, 768, features.uplink_bandwidth 1024, 1280, 1500, 2000, 3000 or 4000 Description: Specifies the maximum transmitting bandwidth for the IP phone.
  • Page 519 Configuring Basic Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 640-640kb/s 768-768kb/s 1024-1024kb/s 1280-1280kb/s 1500-1500kb/s 2000-2000kb/s 3000-3000kb/s 4000-4000kb/s If it is set to 0 (Auto), the IP phone will select the appropriate receiving bandwidth automatically. Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Video->Downlink Bandwidth Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 520: Screenshot And Recording

    *.JPG files. For more information, refer to Yealink_SIP_VP-T49G_User_Guide. Yealink IP phones also support capturing the screen display of the IP phone using the action URI. For more information, refer to Scenario A - Capturing the Current Screen of the Phone on page 646.

  • Page 521: Call And Conference Recording (For Sip Vp-T49G Ip Phones)

    USB flash drive which you inserted into the phone during an active call. You can record the audio or video call by tapping the Record soft key during a call. Yealink IP phones also support recording calls by tapping record/URL record key. For more information,...

  • Page 522: Call And Conference Recording (For Cp860 Ip Phones)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Recording a video call The recorded calls are saved in *.mkv format and include a date & time stamp and the other party’s number/IP address/name (or the first person’s number/IP address/name you called), for example, 20150731-1630-Mishoel.mkv was created on July 31, 2015, at 16:30 and you have a...

  • Page 523: External Monitor

    If the phone is not in an active video call, the external monitor will only display a Yealink logo. To use this feature, ensure that the external monitor has been connected to the HDMI port of the phone.

  • Page 524: Output Resolution

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default features.hdmi_out_status 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to present the video images captured from camera (both near site and far site) on the external monitor during a video call.
  • Page 525 Configuring Basic Features Configure the maximum video resolution of IP phone for SIP account. <MAC>.cfg Parameter: account.X.video.max_resolution Configure the maximum video resolution of IP phone for SIP account. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m= mod_data&p=account-basic&q=load &acc=0 Web User Interface Local Configure the output resolution of external monitor.
  • Page 526 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None 0, 1920x1080f60, 1280x720f60, features.hdmi_out.resolution 720x480f60, 640x480f60 Description: Configures the output resolution of external monitor. automatically select the highest resolution supported by the external monitor 0-Auto ( 1920x1080f60-1920 ×...
  • Page 527 Configuring Basic Features To configure the output resolution of external monitor via web user interface: Click Settings->Video. Select a desired value from the pull-down list of Display. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 528 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones...

  • Page 529: Configuring Advanced Features

    Configuring Advanced Features Configuring Advanced Features This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following advanced features: Remote Phone Book  LDAP  Busy Lamp Field  BLF List  Hide Features Access Code  Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) ...

  • Page 530: Remote Phone Book

    URL of the file (Menu.xml) in the configuration files. You can ask the distributor or Yealink FAE for remote XML phone book template. You can also obtain the remote XML phone book template online: .
  • Page 531 Configuring Advanced Features Where: Specify the contact name between <Name> and </Name>. Specify the contact number between <Telephone> and </Telephone>. Save the file and place this file to the provisioning server. When creating a Menu.xml file, learn the following: <YealinkIPPhoneMenu> indicates the start of a remote phone book file and ...
  • Page 532 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones http://10.2.9.1:99/Department.xml <URL> </URL> </MenuItem> For each XML file that you want to add, add the following strings to the file. Each starts on a separate line: <SoftKeyItem> <Name> </Name> http://10.2.9.1:99/Department.xml <URL>...
  • Page 533 During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server “192.168.1.20”, and downloads the remote phone book file “Menu.xml”. Yealink supplies a phonebook generation tool to generate a remote XML phone book. For more Note Yealink Phonebook Generation Tool User Guide...
  • Page 534 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones local cache of the remote phone book. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T27P/ T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=contacts -remote&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=mod_da ta&p=contacts-remote&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default URL within 511 remote_phonebook.data.X.url...
  • Page 535 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the display name of the remote phone book. Example: remote_phonebook.display_name = Friends “Friends” will be displayed on the LCD screen at the path Menu->Directory. If it is left blank, Remote Phone Book will be the display name. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T42G/T41P IP phones.
  • Page 536 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default features.remote_phonebook.enter_update_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to refresh the local cache of the remote phone book at a time when accessing the remote phone book.

  • Page 537: Ldap

    Configuring Advanced Features Enter the desired time in the Update Time Interval(Seconds) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. LDAP LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) is an application protocol for accessing and maintaining information services for the distributed directory over an IP network. IP phones can be configured to interface with a corporate directory server that supports LDAP version 2 or 3.
  • Page 538 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones LDAP Attributes The following table lists the most common attributes used to configure the LDAP lookup on IP phones. Abbreviation Name Description givenName First name LDAP attribute is made up from given commonName name joined to surname.
  • Page 539 Configuring Advanced Features ldap.call_out_lookup ldap.ldap_sort ldap.incoming_call_special_search.e nable Assign an LDAP key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ programablekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Configure LDAP. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =contacts-LDAP&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=contacts-LDAP&q=l Web User Interface Local Assign an LDAP key. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P)
  • Page 540 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default ldap.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables LDAP feature on the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 541 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default ldap.number_filter = (|(telephoneNumber=%)(mobile=%)(ipPhone=%)) When the number prefix of the telephoneNumber, mobile or ipPhone of the contact record matches the search criteria, the record will be displayed on the LCD screen. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Directory->LDAP->LDAP Number Filter Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 542 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 65535 Description: Configures the port of the LDAP server. Example: ldap.port = 389 Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Directory->LDAP->Port...
  • Page 543 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None String within 99 ldap.password Blank characters Description: Configures the password to login the LDAP server. This parameter can be left blank in case the server allows anonymous to login. Otherwise you will need to provide the password to login the LDAP server.
  • Page 544 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default spaces. Example: ldap.name_attr = cn sn This requires the “cn” and “sn” attributes set for each contact record on the LDAP server. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 545 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None ldap.version 2 or 3 Description: Configures the LDAP protocol version supported by the IP phone. Make sure the protocol value corresponds with the version assigned on the LDAP server. Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 546 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default ldap.ldap_sort 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to sort the search results in alphabetical order or numerical order. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 547 Configuring Advanced Features LDAP Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 987. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default linekey.X.type/ Refer to the programablekey.X.type/ following content expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Description: Configures a DSS key as an LDAP key on the IP phone.
  • Page 548 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default The default value of the line key 1-12 is 15, and the default value of the line key 13-15 is 0. For SIP-T41P IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-15 is 0.
  • Page 549 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=8, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=10, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 550 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu).
  • Page 551 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default DSSKey->Line Key/Programable Key->Label Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label To configure LDAP via web user interface: Click on Directory->LDAP. Enter the values in the corresponding fields. Select the desired values from the corresponding pull-down lists. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 552: Busy Lamp Field (Blf)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To configure an LDAP key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys. Select the desired DSS key. Press , or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field.
  • Page 553 Configuring Advanced Features User-Agent: Yealink SIP-T23G 44.80.0.60 Expires: 30 Event: dialog Content-Length: 0 Example of a NOTIFY message (<state>confirmed</state> shows the call has been established): NOTIFY sip:1010@10.3.20.1:5060 SIP/2.0 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.3.20.2:5060;branch=z9hG4bK276311022 From: <sip:1011@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=3436332841 To: "1010" <sip:1010@10.2.1.48:5060>;tag=3098567568 Call-ID: 0_4117916748@10.3.20.1 CSeq: 4 NOTIFY Contact: <sip:1011@10.3.20.2:5060>...

  • Page 554: Blf Led Mode

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones for the DPickup soft key, refer to Directed Call Pickup on page 395. BLF LED Mode BLF LED Mode provides five kinds of definition for the BLF/BLF List key LED status. As there is no hard line key on SIP VP-T49G and SIP-T48G IP phones, BLF LED mode configuration is only applicable to SIP-T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones.
  • Page 555 Configuring Advanced Features Line Key/Expansion Module Key LED (configured as a BLF key or a BLF List key and BLF LED Mode is set to 2) LED Status Description Fast flashing red (200ms) The monitored user receives an incoming call. The monitored user is dialing.
  • Page 556 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure BLF can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Specify whether to use visual alert and audio alert for BLF pickup. Parameters: features.pickup.blf_visual_enable features.pickup.blf_audio_enable Assign a BLF key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/...
  • Page 557 Configuring Advanced Features P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=dsskey &q=load&model=0 For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=mod_ data&p=dsskey&q=load Specify whether to use visual alert and audio alert for BLF pickup. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T27 P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=featur es-callpickup&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=mod_ data&p=features-callpickup&q=load Configure BLF LED mode. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T27 P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2:...
  • Page 558 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.pickup.blf_visual_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display a visual alert when the monitored user receives an incoming call.
  • Page 559 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Features->General Information->BLF LED Mode Phone User Interface: None Integer from 30 to account.X.blf.subscribe_period 1800 2147483647 Description: Configures the period (in seconds) of the BLF subscription for SIP account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 560 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None account.X.out_dialog_blf_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to handle NOTIFY messages out of the BLF dialog for SIP account X.
  • Page 561 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For ext keys: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).
  • Page 562 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Description: Configures the desired line to apply the BLF key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G)
  • Page 563 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For ext keys:...
  • Page 564 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values DSSKey->Line Key->Extension Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Extension linekey.X.label/ String within Blank expansion_module.X.key.Y.label 99 characters Description: (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key.
  • Page 565 Configuring Advanced Features (Optional.) Enter the directed call pickup code in the Extension field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure visual alert and audio alert for BLF pickup via web user interface: Click on Features->Call Pickup. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Visual Alert for BLF Pickup. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Audio Alert for BLF Pickup.
  • Page 566 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of BLF LED Mode. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure BLF subscription via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.

  • Page 567: Blf List

    Configuring Advanced Features (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Enter the phone number or extension you want to monitor in the Value field. (Optional.) Enter the directed call pickup code in the Extension field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change.
  • Page 568 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configure BLF List. SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T27 P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=accou nt-adv&q=load&acc=0 For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=mod_ data&p=account-adv&q=load&acc=0 Web User Interface Assign a BLF List key. Local Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T27 P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=dsske y&q=load&model=0 For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=mod_...
  • Page 569 X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860 IP phones. Example: account.1.blf.blf_list_uri = 4609@pbx.yealink.com Phone User Interface: None String within 32 account.X.blf_list_code...
  • Page 570 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860 IP phones. Example: account.1.blf_list_code = *97 Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->BLF List Pickup Code Phone User Interface: None String within 32 account.X.blf_list_barge_in_code...
  • Page 571 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: account.1.blf_list_retrieve_call_parked_code = *88 Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->BLF List Retrieve Call Parked Code Phone User Interface: None BLF List Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 987.
  • Page 572 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-27 is 0. For SIP-T42G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-12 is 15, and the default value of the line key 13-15 is 0.
  • Page 573 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) 1-Line 1 2-Line 2 … 16-Line 16 150-H.323 account Example: linekey.1.line = 1 Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860 IP phones. Web User Interface: DSSKey->Line Key->Line Phone User Interface:...

  • Page 574: Hide Features Access Code

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones (Optional.) Enter the retrieve call parked code in the BLF List Retrieve Call Parked Code field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure BLF List keys manually via web user interface: Click on DSSKey->Line Key.
  • Page 575 Configuring Advanced Features The hide feature access codes feature is applicable to the following features: Voice Mail  Pick up  Group Pick up  Barge In (not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860 IP phones)  Retrieve (not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860 IP phones) ...

  • Page 576: Automatic Call Distribution (Acd)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameter: Permitted Parameter Default Values features.hide_feature_access_codes.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display feature name instead of the feature access code when dialing and in talk.
  • Page 577 Configuring Advanced Features on the IP phone by default. You need to enable it on a per-line basis before logging into the ACD system. After the IP phone user logs into the ACD system, the server monitors the IP phone status and then decides whether to assign an incoming call to the user’s IP phone.
  • Page 578 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configure ACD auto available. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =features-acd&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=features-acd&q=loa Web User Interface Local Assign an ACD key. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =dsskey&q=load&model=0...
  • Page 579 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860) Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None account.X.acd.available 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to display the available and unavailable soft keys for SIP account X after the IP phone logs into the ACD system.
  • Page 580 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->ACD Subscribe Period(120~3600s) Phone User Interface: None acd.auto_available 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to automatically change the status of the ACD agent to available after the designated time.
  • Page 581 Configuring Advanced Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values linekey.X.type/ Refer to the following expansion_module.X.key.Y.type content Description: Configures a DSS key to be an ACD key on the IP phone. The digit 42 stands for the key type ACD. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G)
  • Page 582 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Web User Interface: DSSKey->Line Key->Type Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Type linekey.X.label/ String within Blank expansion_module.X.key.Y.label 99 characters Description: (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key.
  • Page 583 Configuring Advanced Features To configure the ACD auto available timer feature via web user interface: Click on Features->ACD. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of ACD Auto Available. Enter the desired timer in the ACD Auto Available Timer(0~120s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 584: Shared Call Appearance (Sca)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired DSS key. Press , or the Switch soft key to select ACD from the Type field. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
  • Page 585 Configuring Advanced Features Configure the private hold soft key. Parameters: phone_setting.custom_softkey_enab custom_softkey_talking.url <y0000000000xx>.cfg Assign a private hold key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Configure the registration line type. Configure the call pull feature access code. Configure the number of DSS keys to be assigned automatically.
  • Page 586 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configure the private hold soft key. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =settings-softkey&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=settings-softkey&q =load Assign a private hold key. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =dsskey&q=load&model=0...
  • Page 587 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860) Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Shared Line Phone User Interface: None String within 32 account.X.shared_line_callpull_code Blank characters Description: Configures the call pull feature access code to retrieve an existing call from another shared phone that is in active or public hold status for SIP account X.
  • Page 588 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: account.1.number_of_linekey = 2 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “features.auto_linekeys.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 and CP860 IP phones.
  • Page 589 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Settings->Softkey Layout->Custom Softkey Phone User Interface: None custom_softkey_talking.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the custom file for the soft key presented on the LCD screen when in the Talking state. Example: custom_softkey_talking.url = http://192.168.1.20/XMLfiles/Talking.xml During the auto provisioning process, the IP phone connects to the provisioning server...
  • Page 590 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For ext keys: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).
  • Page 591 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For ext keys: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured). Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2, CP860 IP phones.
  • Page 592 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To configure the shared line settings on the primary phone via web user interface: Register the primary account (e.g., 4609). Click on Advanced, select Shared Call Appearance from the pull-down list of Shared Line.
  • Page 593 Configuring Advanced Features The default value is 1. In this example, the value is set to 2. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the shared line settings on alternate phone via web user interface: Register the alternate account (e.g., 4609_1). (Enter the primary account 4609 in the Register Name field.)
  • Page 594 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Click on Advanced, select Shared Call Appearance from the pull-down list of Shared Line. Enter the desired number in the Number of line key field. This field appears only if Auto Linekeys is enabled.
  • Page 595 Configuring Advanced Features Enter the call pull feature access code (e.g., *11) in the Call Pull Feature Access Code field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the private hold soft key via web user interface: Click on Settings->Softkey Layout. Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Custom Softkey.

  • Page 596: Bridge Lines Appearance (Bla)

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To configure a private hold key via web user interface: Click on DSSKey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select Private Hold from the pull-down list of Type. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
  • Page 597 Configuring Advanced Features Procedure BLA can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the registration line type. Parameter: account.X.shared_line Configure the BLA number. Parameter: <MAC>.cfg Configuration File account.X.bla_number Configure the period of BLA subscription. Parameter: account.X.bla_subscribe_period Configure the registration line type. Configure the BLA number.
  • Page 598 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->Shared Line Phone User Interface: None String within 99 account.X.bla_number Blank characters Description: Configures the BLA number for SIP account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G)

  • Page 599: Message Waiting Indicator

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Account->Advanced->BLA Subscription Period Phone User Interface: None To configure the BLA feature via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Select Draft BLA from the pull-down list of Shared Line. Enter the desired value in the BLA Number field.
  • Page 600 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones IP phones support both solicited and unsolicited MWI. Unsolicited MWI Unsolicited MWI is a server related feature. The IP phone sends a SUBSCRIBE message to the server for message-summary updates. The server sends a message-summary NOTIFY within the subscription dialog each time the MWI status changes.
  • Page 601 Configuring Advanced Features http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=ac count-adv&q=load&acc=0 For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=m od_data&p=account-adv&q=load&acc Configure the voice mail number for SIP Phone User Interface account X. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.subscribe_mwi 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to subscribe the message waiting indicator for SIP account 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone will send a SUBSCRIBE message to the server for...
  • Page 602 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default subscription dialog. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P)
  • Page 603 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the voice mail number for SIP account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860)
  • Page 604 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To configure subscribe for MWI via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Subscribe for MWI.

  • Page 605: Short Message Service (Sms)

    Click Confirm to accept the change. Short Message Service (SMS) SMS feature allows users to send and receive text messages using Yealink IP phones. It depends on support from a SIP server. When receiving a new text message, the phone will play a warning tone. The power indicator LED will slow flash red, and the LCD screen will prompt receiving new text messages with the number of waiting messages.

  • Page 606: Multicast Paging

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.text_message.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to send or receive text message(s). 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: None...
  • Page 607 Configuring Advanced Features multicast.paging_address.X.ip_address Configure the multicast paging group name for a paging list key. Parameter: multicast.paging_address.X.label Assign a multicast paging key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ programablekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.value/ programablekey.X.value/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.value linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Assign a paging list key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ programmable.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.label/ programmable.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label...
  • Page 608 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configure the multicast IP address and port number for a paging list key. Configure the multicast paging group name for a paging list key. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29 G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=c ontacts-multicastIP&q=load...
  • Page 609 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the codec of multicast paging. Example: multicast.codec = G722 Note: It is not applicable to SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones. Web User Interface: Features->General Information->Multicast Codec Phone User Interface: None multicast.paging_address.X.ip_address String Blank (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description:...
  • Page 610 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Paging List->Option->Edit->Label Multicast Paging Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 987.
  • Page 611 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default The default value of the line key 1-12 is 15, and the default value of the line key 13-15 is 0. For SIP-T41P IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-15 is 0. For SIP-T27P IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-21 is 0.
  • Page 612 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For programable keys:...
  • Page 613 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label Paging List key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 987. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default linekey.X.type/ programablekey.X.type/ Refer to the...
  • Page 614 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-29 is 0. For SIP-T46G/T29G IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-16 is 15, and the default value of the line key 17-27 is 0.
  • Page 615 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=1, the default value is 28 (History). When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu). When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory).
  • Page 616 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=10, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For SIP-T19(P) E2 IP phones: When X=1, the default value is 28 (History).
  • Page 617 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 618 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Enter the sending multicast address and port number in the Paging Address field. Enter the label in the Label field. The label will appear on the LCD screen when sending the RTP multicast.

  • Page 619: Receiving Rtp Stream

    Configuring Advanced Features Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a paging list key via web user interface: Click on DSSKey->Line Key (or Programable Key). In the desired DSS key field, select Paging List from the pull-down list of Type. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field.
  • Page 620 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Paging Barge This parameter defines the priority of the voice/video call in progress, and decides how the IP phone handles the incoming multicast paging calls when there is already a voice/video call in progress.
  • Page 621 Configuring Advanced Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default multicast.listen_address.X.ip_address IP address: port Blank (X ranges from 1 to 10) Description: Configures the multicast address and port number that the IP phone listens to. Example: multicast.listen_address.1.ip_address = 224.5.6.20:10008 Note: The valid multicast IP addresses range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.
  • Page 622 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Directory->Multicast IP->Paging Priority Active Phone User Interface: None multicast.receive_priority.priority Integer from 0 to 10 Description: Configures the priority of the voice/video call (a normal phone call rather than a multicast paging call) in progress.

  • Page 623: Call Recording

    Configuring Advanced Features Enter the label in the Label field. The label will appear on the LCD screen when receiving the RTP multicast. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure paging barge and paging priority active features via web user interface: Click on Directory->Multicast IP.
  • Page 624 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones recording and indicate the recording status. Normally, there are 2 main methods to trigger a recording on a certain server. We call them record and URL record. Record is for the IP phone to send the server a SIP INFO message containing a specific header.

  • Page 625: Url Record

    GET /URLRecord/record.xml HTTP/1.1\r\n Request Method: GET Request URI: /URLRecord/record.xml Request version: HTTP/1.1 Host: 10.3.5.97:8080\r\n User-agent: Yealink SIP-T23G 44.80.0.60 00:15:65:74:B1:50\r\n If the recording is successfully started, the server will respond with a 200 OK message. Example of a 200 OK message: <YealinkIPPhoneText> <Title>...
  • Page 626 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones <YealinkIPPhoneText> Procedure Call recording key can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Assign a record key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Assign a URL record key. Parameters: <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File linekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type...
  • Page 627 Configuring Advanced Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default linekey.X.type/ Refer to the following expansion_module.X.key.Y.type content Description: Configures a DSS key as a record key on the IP phone. The digit 25 stands for the key type Record. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G)
  • Page 628 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: DSSKey->Line Key->Type Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Type linekey.X.label/ String within 99 Blank expansion_module.X.key.Y.label characters Description: (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key.
  • Page 629 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP-T42G/T41P) X ranges from 1 to 21 (for SIP-T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) For ext keys:...
  • Page 630 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the URL to record a call. For line keys: X ranges from 1 to 29 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G) X ranges from 1 to 27 (for SIP-T46G/T29G)
  • Page 631 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Label To configure a record key via web user interface: Click on DSSKey->Line Key. In the desired DSS key field, select Record from the pull-down list of Type. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Click Confirm to accept the change.

  • Page 632: Hot Desking

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To configure a URL record key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys. Select the desired DSS key. Press , or the Switch soft key to select URL Record from the Type field.
  • Page 633 Configuring Advanced Features Assign a hot desking key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ programablekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Assign a hot desking key. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29 G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) Web User Interface Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p= dsskey&q=load&model=0 For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m= mod_data&p=dsskey&q=load Phone User Interface Assign a hot desking key. Details of Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters...
  • Page 634 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of user name on the hot desking login wizard when pressing the Hot Desking key. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to CP860 IP phones.
  • Page 635 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values hotdesking.dsskey_outbound_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of outbound server on the hot desking login wizard when pressing the Hot Desking key. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to CP860 IP phones. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 636 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values X=1-4, 12-14 (for SIP VP-T49G) X=1-10, 12-14 (for SIP-T48G/T46G) X=1-14 (for SIP-T29G) X=1-9, 13, 14 (for SIP-T19(P) E2) For ext keys: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).
  • Page 637 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=8, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status). When X=10, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 638 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values When X=14, the default value is 2 (Forward). For ext keys: When Y=1, the default value is 37 (Switch). When Y= 2 to 20, 22 to 40, the default value is 0 (NA).

  • Page 639: Logon Wizard

    Configuring Advanced Features (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a hot desking key via phone user interface: Press Menu->Features->DSS Keys. Select the desired DSS key. Press , or the Switch soft key to select Key Event from the Type field.
  • Page 640 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T 27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=feat ures-general&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=mo d_data&p=features-general&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameters: Permitted Parameters Default Values 0 or 1 phone_setting.logon_wizard Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to provide the logon wizard during the first startup.
  • Page 641 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values hotdesking.startup_username_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to provide input field of user name on the logon wizard during the first startup. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is not applicable to CP860 IP phones. It works only if there is no registered account on the IP phone and the value of the parameter “phone_setting.logon_wizard”...
  • Page 642 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Note: It is not applicable to CP860 IP phones. It works only if there is no registered account on the IP phone and the value of the parameter “phone_setting.logon_wizard” is set to 1 (Enabled).

  • Page 643: Action Url

    Configuring Advanced Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Logon Wizard. Click Confirm to accept the change. Action URL Action URL allows IP phones to interact with web server applications by sending an HTTP or HTTPS GET request. You can specify a URL that triggers a GET request when a specified event occurs.
  • Page 644 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Event Description Terminated When the IP phone terminates a call. Open DND When the IP phone enables the DND mode. Close DND When the IP phone disables the DND mode. Open Always Forward When the IP phone enables the always forward.
  • Page 645 Configuring Advanced Features Event Description Close Call Waiting When the IP phone disables the call waiting. When the IP phone presses the HEADSET key (not Headset applicable to CP860 IP phones). When the IP phone presses the Speakerphone key (not Handfree applicable to CP860 IP phones).
  • Page 646 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Variable Value Description incoming call. The display name of the caller when the IP phone places a call. $display_local The display name of the callee when the IP phone receives an incoming call.
  • Page 647 Configuring Advanced Features action_url.transfer_call action_url.blind_transfer_call action_url.attended_transfer_call action_url.hold action_url.unhold action_url.held action_url.unheld action_url.mute action_url.unmute action_url.missed_call action_url.call_terminated action_url.busy_to_idle action_url.idle_to_busy action_url.ip_change action_url.forward_incoming_call action_url.reject_incoming_call action_url.answer_new_incoming_call action_url.transfer_finished action_url.transfer_failed action_url.setup_autop_finish action_url.call_waiting_on action_url.call_waiting_off action_url.headset action_url.handfree action_url.cancel_callout action_url.remote_busy action_url.call_remote_canceled Configure action URL. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29 G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) Web User Interface E2/CP860: Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=f...
  • Page 648 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default action_url.setup_completed URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends after startup. The value format is: http(s)://IP address of server/help.xml? variable name=variable value.
  • Page 649 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default action_url.registered = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Registered Phone User Interface: None action_url.unregistered URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends after an account is unregistered. Example: action_url.unregistered = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Unregistered...
  • Page 650 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None action_url.on_hook URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when on hook. Example: action_url.on_hook = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->On Hook...
  • Page 651 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when establishing a call. Example: action_url.call_established = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Established Phone User Interface: None action_url.dnd_on URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when DND feature is enabled.
  • Page 652 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default action_url.always_fwd_on = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Open Always Forward Phone User Interface: None action_url.always_fwd_off URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when always forward feature is disabled.
  • Page 653 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None action_url.no_answer_fwd_on URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when no answer forward feature is enabled. Example: action_url.no_answer_fwd_on = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Open NoAnswer Forward Phone User Interface: None...
  • Page 654 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default action_url.blind_transfer_call URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when performing a blind transfer. Example: action_url.blind_transfer_call = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Blind Transfer...
  • Page 655 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when resuming a hold call. Example: action_url.unhold = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->UnHold Phone User Interface: None action_url.held URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when a call is held.
  • Page 656 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Mute Phone User Interface: None action_url.unmute URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when un-muting a call.
  • Page 657 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None action_url.busy_to_idle URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when changing the state of the IP phone from busy to idle. Example: action_url.busy_to_idle = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Busy To Idle Phone User Interface: None...
  • Page 658 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None action_url.forward_incoming_call URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when forwarding an incoming call. Example: action_url.forward_incoming_call = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Forward Incoming Call...
  • Page 659 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default action_url.transfer_finished URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when completing a call transfer. Example: action_url.transfer_finished = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Transfer Finished Phone User Interface: None action_url.transfer_failed URL within 511 characters...
  • Page 660 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when call waiting feature is enabled. Example: action_url.call_waiting_on = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Open Call Waiting Phone User Interface: None action_url.call_waiting_off...
  • Page 661 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when pressing the Speakerphone key. Example: action_url.handfree = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Note: It is not applicable to CP860 IP phones. Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Handfree Phone User Interface: None action_url.cancel_callout URL within 511 characters...

  • Page 662: Action Uri

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the action URL the IP phone sends when the remote party cancels the outgoing call in the ringing state. Example: action_url.call_remote_canceled = http://192.168.0.20/help.xml?IP=$ip Web User Interface: Features->Action URL->Call Remote Canceled...

  • Page 663: Sip Notify Message

    SIP Notify Message In addition, Yealink IP phones support performing the specified action immediately by accepting a SIP NOTIFY message with the “Event: ACTION-URI” header from a SIP proxy server. The message body of the SIP NOTIFY message may contain variable named as “key” and variable value, which are separated by “=”.
  • Page 664 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones The following table lists pre-defined variable values: Variable Value Phone Action Press the OK/√ key. ENTER Press the Enter soft key. Press the Speakerphone key (not applicable to SPEAKER CP860 IP phones).
  • Page 665 Configuring Advanced Features Variable Value Phone Action Place a call to xxx from SIP URI y. Example: http://10.3.20.10/servlet?key=number=1234&o number=xxx&outgoing_uri=y utgoing_uri=1006@10.2.1.48 (1234 means the number you dial out; 1006@10.2.1.48 means the SIP URL you dial from.) For SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T29G/ T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2 IP OFFHOOK phones: Pick up the handset.
  • Page 666 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Variable Value Phone Action CallWaitingOff Deactivate the call waiting feature. Activate an always/busy/no answer forward feature to xxx for the IP phone (“xxx” means the destination number) The valid value of “n” means the duration time (seconds) before forwarding incoming calls (n is the times of 6, e.g., 24).

  • Page 667: Configuring Trusted Ip Address For Action Uri

    Yealink IP phones also support a combination of the variable values in the URI, but the order of the variable value is determined by the operation of the phone. The valid URI format is: http(s)://phone IP address/servlet?key=variable value[;variable value]...
  • Page 668 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure Specify the trusted IP address for action URI using the configuration files or locally. Configure the IP phone to receive the action URI requests. Parameter: features.action_uri.enable <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Specify the trusted IP address(es) for sending the action URI to the IP phone.
  • Page 669 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None features.action_uri_limit_ip IP address or any Blank Description: Configures the IP address of the server from which the IP phone receives the action URI requests. For discontinuous IP addresses, multiple IP addresses are separated by commas. For continuous IP addresses, the format likes *.*.*.* and the “*”...

  • Page 670: Scenario A - Capturing The Current Screen Of The Phone

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Multiple IP addresses are separated by commas. If you enter “any” in this field, the IP phone can receive and handle GET requests from any IP address. If you leave the field blank, the IP phone cannot receive or handle any HTTP GET request.

  • Page 671: Scenario B - Placing A Call Via Web User Interface

    You can save the image to your local system. Note Frequent capture may affect the phone performance. Yealink recommend you to capture the phone screen display within a minimum interval of 4 seconds. Scenario B - Placing a Call via Web User Interface You can place a call via web user interface.

  • Page 672: Server Redundancy

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones If you place a call via web user interface but the trusted IP address has not been configured, the web user interface prompts “Call fail”. To place a call via web user interface: Click on Directory->Phone Call Info.

  • Page 673: Phone Registration

    Working Server: Server 1 is configured with the domain name of the working server. For example: yealink.pbx.com. DNS mechanism is used such that the working server is resolved to multiple servers for failover purpose. The working server is deployed in redundant pairs, designated as primary and secondary servers.
  • Page 674 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Successive registration: The IP phone only registers to one server at a time. The IP phone  first registers to the working server. In a failure situation, the IP phone registers to the fallback server.
  • Page 675 X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860) Example: account.1.sip_server.1.address = yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: Account->Register->SIP Server Y->Server Host Phone User Interface: None account.X.sip_server.Y.port...
  • Page 676 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None account.X.sip_server.Y.expires Integer from 30 3600 to 2147483647 (X ranges from 1 to 16, Y ranges from 1 to 2) Description: Configures the registration expiration time (in seconds) of the SIP server Y for SIP account X.
  • Page 677 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.sip_server.Y.register_on_enable 0 or 1 (X ranges from 1 to 16, Y ranges from 1 to 2) Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to send registration requests to the secondary server for SIP account X when encountering a failover. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G)
  • Page 678 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Status IP address or domain account.X.outbound_host Blank name Description: Configures the IP address or domain name of the outbound proxy server 1 for SIP account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G)
  • Page 679 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None IP address or account.X.backup_outbound_host Blank domain name Description: Configures the IP address or domain name of the outbound proxy server 2 for SIP account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G)
  • Page 680 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Account->Register->Outbound Proxy Server 2->Port Phone User Interface: None account.X.fallback.redundancy_type 0 or 1 Description: Configures the registration mode for the IP phone in fallback mode. 0-Concurrent Registration 1-Successive Registration...
  • Page 681 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None Phone User Interface: None Integer from 0 to account.X.outbound_proxy_fallback_interval 3600 65535 Description: Configures the time interval (in seconds) for the IP phone to detect whether the working outbound proxy server is available by sending the registration request after the fallback server takes over call control.
  • Page 682 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 3-duration: the IP phone will send requests to the last registered server first. If the time defined by the “account.X.sip_server.Y.failback_timeout” parameter expires, the phone will retry to send requests to the primary server.
  • Page 683 Configuring Advanced Features To configure server redundancy for fallback purpose via web user interface: Click on Account->Register. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Configure registration parameters of the selected account in the corresponding fields. Configure parameters of SIP server 1 and SIP server 2 in the corresponding fields. If you use outbound proxy servers, do the following: Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Enable Outbound Proxy Server.
  • Page 684 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configure parameters of outbound proxy server 1 and outbound proxy server 2 in the corresponding fields. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure server redundancy for failover purpose via web user interface: Click on Account->Register.
  • Page 685 Configuring Advanced Features Select DNS-NAPTR from the pull-down list of Transport. If you use outbound proxy servers, do the following: Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Enable Outbound Proxy Server. Configure parameters of outbound proxy server 1/2 in the corresponding fields. You must set the port of outbound proxy server to 0 for NAPTR, SRV and A queries.

  • Page 686: Server Domain Name Resolution

    A query. If no port is found through the DNS query, 5060 will be used. The following details the procedures of DNS query for the IP phone to resolve the domain name (e.g., yealink.pbx.com) of working server into the IP address, port and transport protocol. NAPTR (Naming Authority Pointer) First, the IP phone sends NAPTR query to get the NAPTR pointer and transport protocol.
  • Page 687 Configuring Advanced Features “_sip._tcp.yealink.pbx.com”. If the flag of the NAPTR record returned is empty, the IP phone will perform NAPTR query again according to the previous NAPTR query result. SRV (Service Location Record) The IP phone performs an SRV query on the record returned from the NAPTR for the host name and the port number.
  • Page 688 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones either succeeds in making a call or exhausts all servers at which point the call will fail. At the start of a call, server availability is determined by SIP signaling failure. SIP signaling failure depends on the SIP protocol being used as described below: If TCP is used, then the signaling fails if the connection or the send fails.
  • Page 689 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-UDP 1-TCP 2-TLS 3-DNS-NAPTR If the value of the parameter is set to 3 (DNS-NAPTR) and no server port is given, the IP phone performs the DNS NAPTR and SRV queries for the service type and port. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P)

  • Page 690: Static Dns Cache

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Static DNS Cache Failover redundancy can only be utilized when the configured domain name of the server is resolved to multiple IP addresses. If the IP phone is not configured with a DNS server, or the DNS query returns no result from a DNS server, you can configure a set of DNS NAPTR/SRV/A records into the IP phone.
  • Page 691 Configuring Advanced Features Procedure Static DNS cache can be configured only using the configuration files. Configure NAPTR/SRV/A records. Parameters: dns_cache_naptr.X.name dns_cache_naptr.X.flags dns_cache_naptr.X.order dns_cache_naptr.X.preference dns_cache_naptr.X.replace dns_cache_naptr.X.service dns_cache_naptr.X.ttl <y0000000000xx>.cfg dns_cache_srv.X.name dns_cache_srv.X.port dns_cache_srv.X.priority dns_cache_srv.X.target Configuration File dns_cache_srv.X.weight dns_cache_srv.X.ttl dns_cache_a.X.name dns_cache_a.X.ip dns_cache_a.X.ttl Configure the IP phone whether to cache the additional DNS records.
  • Page 692 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Configures the domain name to which NAPTR record X refers. Example: dns_cache_naptr.1.name = yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_naptr.X.flags S, A, U or P...
  • Page 693 Domain name Blank (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures a domain name to be used for the next SRV query in NAPTR record X. Example: dns_cache_naptr.1.replace = _sip._tcp.yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_naptr.X.service String within 32...
  • Page 694 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_naptr.X.ttl Integer from 30 to 2147483647 (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the time interval (in seconds) that NAPTR record X may be cached before the record should be consulted again.
  • Page 695 Domain name Blank (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the domain name of the target host for an A query in SRV record X. Example: dns_cache_srv.1.target = server1.yealink.pbx.com Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None dns_cache_srv.X.weight Integer from 0 to 65535...
  • Page 696 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None dns_cache_srv.X.ttl Integer from 30 to (X ranges from 1 to 12) 2147483647 Description: Configures the time interval (in seconds) that SRV record X may be cached before the record should be consulted again.
  • Page 697 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default dns_cache_a.X.ttl Integer from 30 to 2147483647 (X ranges from 1 to 12) Description: Configures the time interval (in seconds) that A record X may be cached before the record should be consulted again. Example: dns_cache_a.1.ttl = 3600 Web User Interface:...

  • Page 698: Vlan

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures whether preferentially to use the static DNS cache for domain name resolution of the server for SIP account X. 0-Use domain name resolution from the DNS server preferentially...

  • Page 699: Lldp

    Configuring Advanced Features VLAN assignment method can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the VLAN assignment method. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: network.vlan.vlan_change.enable Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default network.vlan.vlan_change.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to obtain VLAN ID using lower priority of VLAN assignment method or disable VLAN feature when the IP phone cannot obtain VLAN ID using the current VLAN assignment method.
  • Page 700 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones configurations on the IP phones are different from the ones sent by the switch, the IP phones perform an update and reboot. This allows the IP phones to be plugged into any switch, obtain their VLAN IDs, and then start communications with the call control.
  • Page 701 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Status network.lldp.packet_interval Integer from 1 to 3600 Description: Configures the interval (in seconds) for the IP phone to send the LLDP (Linker Layer Discovery Protocol) request. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “network.lldp.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.

  • Page 702: Cdp

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones field. Enter the priority value (1-3600s) in the Packet Interval field. Press the Save soft key to accept the change. The IP phone reboots automatically to make settings effective after a period of time.
  • Page 703 Configuring Advanced Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default network.cdp.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the CDP (Cisco Discovery Protocol) feature on the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If it is set to 1, the IP phone will attempt to determine its VLAN ID through CDP. If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.

  • Page 704: Manual Configuration For Vlan In The Wired Network

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Enter the desired time interval in the Packet Interval (1~3600s) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after a reboot.
  • Page 705 Configuring Advanced Features network.vlan.pc_port_priority Configure VLAN for the Internet port and PC port manually. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T 27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) Web User Interface E2/CP860: Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=net work-adv&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=mo d_data&p=network-adv&q=load Configure VLAN for the Internet port and Phone User Interface PC port manually.
  • Page 706 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->VLAN->WAN Port->VID (1-4094) Phone User Interface: Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Network->VLAN->WAN Port->VID network.vlan.internet_port_priority Integer from 0 to 7 Description: Configures VLAN priority for the Internet (WAN) port.
  • Page 707 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->VLAN->PC Port->VID (1-4094) Phone User Interface: Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Network->VLAN->PC Port->VID network.vlan.pc_port_priority Integer from 0 to 7 Description: Configures VLAN priority for the PC (LAN) port. 7 is the highest priority, 0 is the lowest priority.

  • Page 708: Dhcp Vlan

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. To configure VLAN for PC port via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced.
  • Page 709 Configuring Advanced Features to supply the VLAN ID by default. You can customize the DHCP option used to request the VLAN ID. Procedure DHCP VLAN can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure DHCP VLAN discovery feature. Parameters: <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File network.vlan.dhcp_enable...
  • Page 710 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Network->Advanced->VLAN->DHCP VLAN->Active Phone User Interface: Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Network->VLAN->DHCP VLAN->DHCP VLAN network.vlan.dhcp_option Integer from 1 to 255 Description: Configures the DHCP option from which the IP phone will obtain the VLAN settings. You can configure at most five DHCP options and separate them by commas.

  • Page 711: Configuring Vlan Feature In The Wireless Network

    Configuring VLAN Feature in the Wireless Network Yealink IP phones support VLAN in the wireless network. This feature is disabled by default. The method that the phones use to obtain VLAN in the wireless network is the same as the one in the wired network.
  • Page 712 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default LLDP/CDP/DHCP VLAN. The assignment takes effect in this order: assignment via LLDP/CDP, manual configuration, then assignment via DHCP. Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.

  • Page 713: Vpn

    Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures VLAN priority in the wireless network for the IP phone. 7 is the highest priority, 0 is the lowest priority. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “wifi.vlan_enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 714 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones VPN Technology IP phones support SSL VPN, which provides remote-access VPN capabilities through SSL. OpenVPN is a full featured SSL VPN software solution that creates secure connections in remote access facilities, designed to work with the TUN/TAP virtual network interface. TUN and TAP are virtual network kernel devices.
  • Page 715 Configuring Advanced Features http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=ne twork-adv&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=m od_data&p=network-adv&q=load Phone User Interface Configure VPN feature. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default network.vpn_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables OpenVPN feature on the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.

  • Page 716: Voice Quality Monitoring

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Click Browse to locate the TAR file from the local system. Click Upload to upload the TAR file. The web user interface prompts the message “Import config…”. In the VPN block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of Active.

  • Page 717: Rtcp-Xr

    Configuring Advanced Features quality report collector. Two mechanisms for voice quality monitoring are supported by Yealink IP phones: RTCP-XR  VQ-RTCPXR  RTCP-XR The RTCP-XR mechanism, complaint with RFC 3611-RTP Control Extended Reports (RTCP XR), provides the metrics contained in RTCP-XR packets for monitoring the quality of calls. These metrics include network packet loss, delay metrics, analog metrics and voice quality metrics.
  • Page 718 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Settings->Voice Monitoring->Voice RTCP-XR Report Note: For SIP VP-T49G and CP860 IP phones, you cannot configure this feature via web user interface. Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.rtcp_xr_report.enable 0 or 1...

  • Page 719: Vq-Rtcpxr

    Configuring Advanced Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Voice RTCP-XR Report. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. VQ-RTCPXR The VQ-RTCPXR mechanism, complaint with 6035, sends the service quality metric reports...
  • Page 720 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Users can check the voice quality data of the last call via web user interface or phone user interface. options of the RTP status to be displayed on the phone user interface.
  • Page 721 Configuring Advanced Features Configure the options of the RTP status displayed on the phone user interface. Parameters: phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_start_time.e nable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_stop_ti me.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_local_call_id. enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_remote_call_ id.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_local_codec. enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_remote_cod ec.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_jitter.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_jitter_buffer_ max.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_packets_lost. enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_symm_onew ay_delay.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_round_trip_d elay.enable phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_moslq.enabl phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_moscq.enabl Configure the central report collector.
  • Page 722 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configure VQ-RTCPXR. Configure the phone to display RTP status showing the voice quality report of the last call on the web user interface. Configure the phone to display RTP status showing the voice quality report of the last call or the current call on the phone user interface.
  • Page 723 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to send a session quality report to the central report collector at the end of each call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Settings->Voice Monitoring->VQ RTCP-XR Session Report Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.interval_report.enable...
  • Page 724 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Description: Configures the threshold value of listening MOS score (MOS-LQ) multiplied by 10. The threshold value of MOS-LQ causes the phone to send a warning alert quality report to the central report collector.
  • Page 725 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values greater than or equal to 500, the phone will send a warning alert quality report to the central report collector; when the value of one way delay computed by the phone is less than 500, the phone will not send a warning alert quality report to the central report collector.
  • Page 726 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the voice quality data of the last call or current call to be displayed on the LCD screen. You can view the voice quality data of the last call on the phone at the path Menu->Status->More->RTP (RTP Status).
  • Page 727 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Phone User Interface: None phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_local_call_id.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone to display Local User on the LCD screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable”...
  • Page 728 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Description: Enables or disables the phone to display Local Codec on the LCD screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled).
  • Page 729 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_jitter_buffer_max.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone to display JitteBufferMax on the LCD screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). Web User Interface: Settings->Voice Monitoring->Report options on phone->JitteBufferMax Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 730 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values None phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr_display_round_trip_delay.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the phone to display RoundTripDelay on the LCD screen. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “phone_setting.vq_rtcpxr.states_show_on_gui.enable”...
  • Page 731 Configuring Advanced Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Phone User Interface: None String account.X.vq_rtcpxr.collector_name within 32 Blank characters Description: Configures the host name of the central report collector that accepts voice quality reports contained in SIP PUBLISH messages for SIP account X. X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P)
  • Page 732 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values from 1 to 65535 Description: Configures the port of the central report collector that accepts voice quality reports contained in SIP PUBLISH messages for SIP account X.
  • Page 733 Configuring Advanced Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of VQ RTCP-XR Interval Report. Enter the desired value in the Period for Interval Report field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure alert report for VQ-RTCPXR via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice Monitoring.
  • Page 734 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To configure RTP status displayed on the web page via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice Monitoring. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Display Report options on Web.
  • Page 735 Configuring Advanced Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Display Report options on phone. Click Confirm to accept the change. The RTP status will appear on the phone user interface at the path: Menu->Status->More…. To configure the options of the RTP status displayed on the LCD screen via web user interface: Click on Settings->Voice Monitoring.

  • Page 736: Quality Of Service

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Repeat the step 2 to add more items to the Enabled column. To remove an item from the Enabled column, select the desired item and then click To adjust the display order of enabled items, select the desired item and then click The LCD screen will display the item(s) in the adjusted order.

  • Page 737: Voice Qos

    Configuring Advanced Features QoS provides better network service through the following features: Supporting dedicated bandwidth  Improving loss characteristics  Avoiding and managing network congestion  Shaping network traffic  Setting traffic priorities across the network  The Best-Effort service is the default QoS model in IP networks. It provides no guarantees for data delivering, which means delay, jitter, packet loss and bandwidth allocation are unpredictable.
  • Page 738 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Video QoS To ensure acceptable visual quality for video, video packets emanated from the IP phones should be configured with a high transmission priority. SIP QoS SIP protocol is used for creating, modifying and terminating two-party or multi-party sessions.
  • Page 739 Configuring Advanced Features SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T4 0P/T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21 (P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: Configure the DSCPs for voice packets and SIP packets. Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/serv Web User Interface Local let?p=network-adv&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: Configure the DSCPs for voice packets, SIP packets and video packets. http://<phoneIPAddress>/serv let?m=mod_data&p=network- adv&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters:...
  • Page 740 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->SIP QoS (0~63) Phone User Interface: None network.qos.audiotos Integer from 0 to 63 Description: Configures the DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) for voice packets.
  • Page 741 Configuring Advanced Features Enter the desired value in the SIP QoS (0~63) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. To configure DSCPs for voice packets and SIP packets via web user interface (take SIP VP-T49G IP phones for example): Click on Network->Advanced.

  • Page 742: Configuring The Ip Phone For Use With A Firewall Or Nat

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Enter the desired value in the SIP QoS (0~63) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after a reboot.

  • Page 743: Reserved Ports

    Configuring Advanced Features Port Port Type Description 5060 SIP (default transport protocol) SIP (when selecting the TCP transport 5060 protocol) SIP (when selecting the TLS transport 5061 protocol) Reserved ports on the IP phone. 50000-50249 TCP/UDP For more information, refer to Reserved (default range) Ports...
  • Page 744 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure Reserved ports can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the range of the UDP ports. Parameters: sip.min_udp_port sip.max_udp_port <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Configure the range of the TCP ports.
  • Page 745 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default For SIP VP-T49G: Network->NAT/Firewall->UDP Port Scope Phone User Interface: For SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: None For SIP VP-T49G: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->NAT->Reserved Port->UDP Lowest Port Integer from sip.max_udp_port 50249 1024 to 65535 Description: Configures the maximum UDP port.
  • Page 746 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Network->NAT/Firewall->TCP Port Scope Phone User Interface: For SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: None For SIP VP-T49G: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->NAT->Reserved Port->TCP Lowest Port Integer from sip.max_tcp_port 50249 1024 to 65535 Description: Configures the maximum TCP port.

  • Page 747: Network Address Translation

    Configuring Advanced Features Enter the desired port scope in the TCP Port Scope field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. Network Address Translation Network Address Translation (NAT) is essentially a translation table that maps public IP address and port combinations to private ones.
  • Page 748 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Static NAT Static NAT defines a one-to-one mapping from one IP subnet to another IP subnet. The mapping includes destination IP address translation in one direction and source IP address translation in the reverse direction. From the NAT device, the original destination address is the virtual host IP address while the mapped-to address is the real host IP address.
  • Page 749 If it is set to 1 (Manual), the IP phone uses the manually configured NAT public address. If it is set to 2 (Auto), the IP phone obtains the NAT public address from the Yealink-supplied server. Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones.
  • Page 750 Blank domain name Description: Displays the NAT public address automatically obtained from the Yealink-supplied server. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “network.static_nat.mode” is set to 2 (Auto). It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones.

  • Page 751: Nat Traversal

    Configuring Advanced Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Route Traversal. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure static NAT via phone user interface: ->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->NAT->NAT Configuration. Tap the Static NAT field and then tap the desired value in the pop-up dialog box. If you tap Manual Settings, enter the IP address or domain name in the NAT Public IP Address field.
  • Page 752 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones STUN (Simple Traversal of UDP over NATs) STUN is a network protocol, used in NAT traversal for applications of real-time voice, video, messaging, and other interactive IP communications. The STUN protocol allows entities behind...
  • Page 753 Configuring Advanced Features Procedure NAT traversal and STUN server can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure NAT traversal and STUN server on a phone basis. Parameters: sip.nat_stun.enable sip.nat_stun.server sip.nat_stun.port <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configure local SIP port and TLS SIP port. Configuration File Parameters: sip.listen_port...
  • Page 754 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones p=settings-sip&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? m=mod_data&p=settings-sip&q= load Configure NAT traversal for account X. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/ T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? p=account-register&q=load&acc For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? m=mod_data&p=account-register &q=load&acc=0 Configure NAT traversal and STUN server on a phone basis.
  • Page 755 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Network->Advanced->NAT->Active For SIP VP-T49G: Network->NAT/Firewall->Active Phone User Interface: For SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Network->NAT->NAT Status For SIP VP-T49G: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->Network->NAT->STUN Config->STUN Status IP address or sip.nat_stun.server Blank domain name Description:...
  • Page 756 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the port of the STUN (Simple Traversal of UDP over NATs) server. Example: sip.nat_stun.port = 3478 Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 757 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Account->Register->NAT Phone User Interface: Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Accounts->AccountX->NAT Status Integer from 1024 to sip.listen_port 5060 65535 Description: Configures the local SIP port. Web User Interface: Settings->SIP->Local SIP Port Phone User Interface: None Integer from 1024 to...
  • Page 758 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Enter the port of the STUN server in the Port field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after a reboot.
  • Page 759 Configuring Advanced Features Select STUN from the pull-down list of NAT. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure local SIP port and TLS SIP port via web user interface: Click on Settings->SIP. Enter the desired local SIP port in the Local SIP Port field. Enter the desired TLS SIP port in the TLS SIP Port field.
  • Page 760 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure NAT traversal and STUN server via phone user interface (take SIP-T23G IP phones for example): Press Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Network->NAT->NAT Status.
  • Page 761 Configuring Advanced Features hAddr: hPort. Keep Alive IP phones can send keep-alive packets to NAT device for keeping the communication port open. Procedure Keep alive feature can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the type of keep-alive packets for account X.
  • Page 762 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default communication port open so that NAT can continue to function for account X. 0-Disabled 1-Default (the IP phone sends UDP packets to the server) 2-Options (the IP phone sends SIP OPTIONS packets to the server)
  • Page 763 Configuring Advanced Features To configure the type of keep-alive packets and keep-alive interval via web user interface: Click on Account->Advanced. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Keep Alive Type. Enter the keep-alive interval in the Keep Alive Interval(Seconds) field.

  • Page 764: Real-Time Transport Protocol

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.nat.rport 0, 1 or 2 Description: Enables or disables NAT Rport feature for account X. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled 2-enable direct process X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G)
  • Page 765 Configuring Advanced Features over IP networks. The UDP port used for RTP streams is traditionally an even-numbered port. For example, the default RTP min port on the IP phones is 11780. The first voice patch sends RTP on port 11780. Additional calls would then use ports 11782, 11784, 11786, etc. up to the max port.

  • Page 766: Tr-069 Device Management

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Network->Advanced->Local RTP Port->Min RTP Port(1~65535) Phone User Interface: None To configure the minimum and maximum RTP port via web user interface: Click on Network->Advanced. In the Local RTP Port block, enter the max and min RTP port in the Max RTP Port(1~65535) and Min RTP Port(1~65535) field respectively.
  • Page 767 Configuring Advanced Features Status and performance monitoring  Diagnostics  The following table provides a description of RPC methods supported by IP phones. RPC Method Description This method is used to discover the set of methods GetRPCMethods supported by the CPE. This method is used to modify the value of one or more SetParameterValues CPE parameters.
  • Page 768 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones RPC Method Description This method is used to remove a particular instance of an DeleteObject object. Yealink TR-069 Technote For more information on TR-069, refer to Procedure TR-069 can be configured using the configuration files or locally.
  • Page 769 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the TR-069 feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Settings->TR069->Enable TR069 Phone User Interface: None String within 128 managementserver.username Blank characters Description: Configures the user name for the IP phone to authenticate with the ACS (Auto Configuration Servers).
  • Page 770 Configures the access URL of the ACS (Auto Configuration Servers). Example: managementserver.url = http://officetelprov.orangero.net:8080/ftacs-digest/ACS Note: Yealink SIP VP-T49G IP phones also support obtaining the URL of the ACS by detecting DHCP option 43. For more information on DHCP option 43, refer to DHCP Option on page 74.
  • Page 771 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None managementserver.periodic_inform_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to periodically report its configuration information to the (Auto Configuration Servers) 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface: Settings->TR069->Enable Periodic Inform Phone User Interface: None Integer from 5 to managementserver.periodic_inform_interval...

  • Page 772: Ipv6 Support

    IPv6 is developed by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) to deal with the long-anticipated problem of IPv4 address exhaustion. Yealink IP Phone supports IPv4 addressing mode, IPv6 addressing mode, as well as an IPv4&IPv6 dual stack addressing mode. IPv4 uses a 32-bit address, consisting of four groups of three decimal digits separated by dots;...
  • Page 773 Configuring Advanced Features Stateless Address Autoconfiguration (SLAAC)/ ICMPv6: SLAAC is one of the most  convenient methods to assign IP addresses to IPv6 nodes. SLAAC requires no manual configuration of the IP phone, minimal (if any) configuration of routers, and no additional servers.
  • Page 774 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure IPv6 can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the IPv6 address assignment method. Parameters: network.ip_address_mode network.ipv6_internet_port.type network.ipv6_internet_port.ip network.ipv6_prefix <MAC>.cfg network.ipv6_internet_port.gateway Configuration File network.ipv6_icmp_v6.enable Configure the IPv6 static DNS address.
  • Page 775 Configuring Advanced Features Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default network.ip_address_mode 0, 1 or 2 Description: Configures the IP address mode. 0-IPv4 1-IPv6 2-IPv4 & IPv6 Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 776 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 1-On If it is set to 0 (Off), the IP phone will use the IPv6 DNS obtained from DHCP. If it is set to 1 (On), the IP phone will use manually configured static IPv6 DNS.
  • Page 777 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Network->Basic->IPv6 Config->Static IP Address->IPv6 Prefix(0~128) Phone User Interface: Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Network->WAN Port->IPv6->Static IPv6 Client->IPv6 IP Prefix network.ipv6_internet_port.gateway IPv6 address Blank Description: Configures the IPv6 default gateway. Example: network.ipv6_internet_port.gateway = 3036:1:1:c3c7:c11c:5447:23a6:255 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “network.ip_address_mode”...
  • Page 778 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Port->IPv6->DHCP IPv6 Client->Staic DNS(Enabled) ->IPv6 Pri.DNS network.ipv6_secondary_dns IPv6 address Blank Description: Configures the secondary IPv6 DNS server. Example: network.ipv6_secondary_dns = 2026:1234:1:1:c3c7:c11c:5447:23a6 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter "network.ip_address_mode" is set to 1 (IPv6) or 2 (IPv4 &...
  • Page 779 Configuring Advanced Features Select the desired address mode (IPv6 or IPv4 & IPv6) from the pull-down list of Mode(IPv4/IPv6). In the IPv6 Config block, mark the DHCP or the Static IP Address radio box. If you mark the Static IP Address radio box, configure the IPv6 address and other configuration parameters in the corresponding fields.
  • Page 780 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones (Optional.) If you mark the DHCP radio box, you can configure the static DNS address in the corresponding fields. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot.
  • Page 781 Configuring Advanced Features In the ICMPv6 Status block, select the desired value from the pull-down list of Active. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone.

  • Page 782: Video Conferencing Features

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Video Conferencing Features The video conferencing features are only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. Video Conferencing You can enable video conferencing feature to be able to configure or use the following features: Configuring Cloud Settings ...
  • Page 783 Configuring Advanced Features Parameter Permitted Values Default 0-Disabled 1-Enabled SIP VP-T49G IP phones. Note: It is only applicable to Web User Interface: Settings->Video->Video Conferencing Features Phone User Interface: Menu->Basic->Video Setting->Video Conferencing Features To configure video conferencing feature via web user interface: Click Settings->Video.

  • Page 784: Configuring Cloud Settings

    You can access Virtual Meeting Rooms(VMR) using SIP VP-T49G IP phones, whilst benefiting from both the hardware features provided by Yealink, such as 1080p HD video and audio, and software features provided by Yealink VC/Zoom/BlueJeans/Pexip/Mind, including high end customisation & interoperability.
  • Page 785 Default cloud.account.X.type Integer from 0 to 5 (X ranges from 1 to 16) Description: Configures the type of Cloud account X. 0-Custom 1-Yealink 2-Zoom 3-Pexip 4-BlueJeans 5-Mind Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. Web User Interface: Account->Cloud Account->Type...
  • Page 786 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default VP-T49G IP phones. Web User Interface: Account->Cloud Account->Lable Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->VC Account->Cloud Account->Lable cloud.account.X.alias String within 99 Blank characters (X ranges from 1 to 16) Description: (Optional.) Configures the alias to be displayed on the touch screen for Pexip Cloud account...
  • Page 787 Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->VC Account->Cloud Account->Server cloud.account.X.sip_server.transport_type Integer from 0 to 4 (X ranges from 1 to 16) Description: Configures the type of transport protocol for Cloud account X (except Yealink Cloud account). 0-UDP 1-TCP 2-TLS 3-DNS-NAPTR Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phone.
  • Page 788 Enter the desired value in the corresponding field respectively. Contact your system administrator for more information. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the transport protocol for Cloud account (except Yealink Cloud account) via web user interface: Click on Account->Cloud Account.
  • Page 789 Configuring Advanced Features Select the desired transport protocol from the pull-down list of Transport. Click Confirm to accept the change. To register a Cloud account via phone user interface: ->Advanced (default password: admin) ->VC Account->Cloud Account. Tap the desired account. Tap the Type field.
  • Page 790 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configure auto answer for Cloud account. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m= Local mod_data&p=account-basic&q=load &acc=0 Configure auto answer for Cloud Phone User Interface account. Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default account.X.auto_answer...
  • Page 791 Configuring Advanced Features Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files or locally. Configure the method of transmitting DTMF digit and the payload type for Cloud account. Parameters: <MAC>.cfg Configuration File cloud.account.X.dtmf.type cloud.account.X.dtmf.info_type cloud.account.X.dtmf.dtmf_payloa Configure the method of transmitting DTMF digit and the payload type for Cloud account.
  • Page 792 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None cloud.account.X.dtmf.dtmf_payload Integer from 96 (X ranges from 1 to 16) to 127 Description: Configures the value of DTMF payload for Cloud account X. Note: It works only if the value of parameter “cloud.account.X.dtmf.type” is set to 1 (RFC2833) or 3 (RFC2833 + SIP INFO).
  • Page 793 Navigate to: Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m= mod_data&p=account-cloud&q=load Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default cloud.account.X.keep_alive_interval Integer from 15 to 2147483647 (X ranges from 1 to 16) Description: Configures the keep-alive interval (in seconds) for Cloud account X (except Yealink Cloud account).
  • Page 794 Web User Interface: Account->Cloud Account->Keep Alive Interval(Seconds) Phone User Interface: None To configure the keep-alive interval for Cloud account (except Yealink Cloud account) via web user interface: Click on Account->Cloud Account. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
  • Page 795 Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. Web User Interface: Account->Cloud Account->SRTP Phone User Interface: None To configure the transport protocol for Cloud account (except Yealink Cloud account) via web user interface: Click on Account->Cloud Account. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account.
  • Page 796 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of SRTP. Click Confirm to accept the change. Configuring the 3rd-Party Virtual Meeting Room A Virtual Meeting Room (VMR) is an online space, typically hosted by a Cloud-service provider, where multiple participants can join a video call.
  • Page 797 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: DSSKey->Line Key->Type Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Type String within 99 linekey.X.label Blank characters Description: (Optional.) Configures the label displayed on the LCD screen for each DSS key. X ranges from 1 to 29 Note: 3rd-Party VMR key is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones.
  • Page 798 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Example: linekey.1.value = 192.168.1.200 Note: 3rd-Party VMR key is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. Web User Interface: DSSKey->Line Key->Value Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->DSS Keys->Line Key X->Value String within 256 linekey.X.pickup_value...

  • Page 799: Configuring H.323 Settings

    Configuring Advanced Features (Optional.) Enter the ID for the meeting room in the Extension field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a 3rd-Party VMR key via phone user interface: ->Features->DSS Keys. Tap the desired line key. Tap the Type field and then tap 3rd-party VMR in the pop-up dialog box. Tap the Platform field and then tap the desired platform in the pop-up dialog box.
  • Page 800 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones H.323 Settings Procedure H.323 settings can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the H.323 account registration information. Parameters: account_h323.enable account_h323.name account_h323.extension account_h323.gk_mode account_h323.gk_server.Y.address account_h323.gk_server.Y.port account_h323.gk_auth.enable account_h323.gk_username account_h323.gk_password <y0000000000xx>.cfg...
  • Page 801 Configuring Advanced Features &acc=0 Configure the H.323 account registration information. Configure the monitor port for the H.323 IP call. Phone User Interface Configure the H.323 protocol. Configure the local early media feature. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.h323_protocol.enable 0 or 1 Description:...
  • Page 802 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Specifies the name that gatekeepers and gateways use to identify this IP phone. Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. Web User Interface: Account->H.323->H.323 Name...
  • Page 803 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the IP address of the gatekeeper Y. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account_h323.gk_mode” is set to 2 (Manual). It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. Web User Interface: Account->H.323->Gatekeeper IP Address Y Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 804 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Specifies the user name for gatekeeper authentication. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “account_h323.gk_auth.enable” is set to 1 (Enabled). It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones.
  • Page 805 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default compatibility between Yealink device and certain devices. Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. Web User Interface: Account->H.323->Local Early Media Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->VC Account->H.323->Local Early Media To configure H.323 protocol via web user interface:...
  • Page 806 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones If you enable the gatekeeper authentication, enter the desired value in the Gatekeeper Username and Gatekeeper Password field respectively. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure local early media feature via web user interface: Click Account->H.323.
  • Page 807 Configuring Advanced Features To configure monitor port for H.323 IP call via web user interface: Click Account->H.323. Enter the desired value in the Protocol Monitor Port field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure H.323 protocol via phone user interface: ->Advanced (default password: admin) ->VC Account->H.323.
  • Page 808 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To configure monitor port for H.323 IP call via phone user interface: ->Advanced (default password: admin) ->VC Account->H.323. Enter the desired value in the Protocol Monitor Port field. Tap the Save soft key.
  • Page 809 Configuring Advanced Features Parameter Permitted Values Default Note: The IP phone cannot automatically answer the incoming H.323 call during a call even if auto answer is enabled. It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. Web User Interface: Account->H.323->H.323 Auto Answer Phone User Interface: Menu->Features->Auto Answer->H.323->On/Off To configure auto answer for H.323 calls via web user interface:...
  • Page 810 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files or locally. Configure the method of transmitting DTMF digit for H.323 calls. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: h323.user_cap.enable Configure the method of transmitting DTMF digits for H.323...

  • Page 811: Sip Ip Call

    Configuring Advanced Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of DTMF Type. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the DTMF type for H.323 via phone user interface: ->Advanced (default password: admin) ->VC Account->H.323. Tap the DTMF Type field and then tap the desired value in the pop-up dialog box. Tap the Save soft key to accept the change.

  • Page 812: Transport Protocol

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Transport Protocol Procedure Transport protocol can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the transport protocol for SIP IP call. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: account.17.sip_server.1.transport_typ Configure the transport protocol for SIP IP call.
  • Page 813 Configuring Advanced Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Transport. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the transport protocol for SIP IP call via phone user interface: ->Advanced (default password: admin) ->VC Account->SIP IP Call. Tap the Transport field and then tap the desired value in the pop-up dialog box.
  • Page 814 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default account.17.auto_answer 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the auto answer feature for SIP IP call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), the IP phone can automatically answer SIP IP call.
  • Page 815 Configuring Advanced Features Tap the Save soft key to accept the change. DTMF You can configure the DTMF type for SIP IP call. Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files or locally. Configure the method of transmitting DTMF digit and the payload type for SIP IP call.
  • Page 816 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default If it is set to 2 (SIP INFO), DTMF digits are transmitted by the SIP INFO messages. If it is set to 3 (RFC2833 + SIP INFO), DTMF digits are transmitted by RTP Events compliant to RFC 2833 and the SIP INFO messages.
  • Page 817 Configuring Advanced Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of DTMF Type. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of DTMF Info Type. It is configurable only if DTMF Type field is set to SIP INFO or RFC2833+SIP INFO. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of DTMF Payload Type(96-127).
  • Page 818 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configure NAT traversal type for SIP IP call. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? Local m=mod_data&p=account-direct& q=load&acc=0 Configure NAT traversal for SIP IP Phone User Interface call. Details of Configuration Parameter:...
  • Page 819 Configuring Advanced Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of NAT. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure NAT traversal type for SIP IP call via phone user interface: ->Advanced (default password: admin) ->VC Account->SIP IP Call. Tap the NAT field and then tap the desired value in the pop-up dialog box.
  • Page 820 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default account.17.nat.rport 0, 1 or 2 Description: Enables or disables NAT Rport feature for SIP IP call. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled 2-enable direct process Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones.
  • Page 821 Configuring Advanced Features Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol You can configure SRTP feature for SIP IP call. Procedure SRTP for SIP IP call can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure SRTP feature for SIP IP call. <MAC>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: account.17.srtp_encryption Configure SRTP feature for SIP IP...

  • Page 822: Dual-Stream Protocol

    SIP calls. You can configure the BFCP for Cloud account (except Yealink Cloud account) and SIP IP call respectively. Before enabling the desired protocol, ensure that the protocol is supported and enabled by the far site you wish to call.
  • Page 823 Configure the BFCP protocol for SIP IP calls. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m= mod_data&p=account-direct&q=load Local Configure the BFCP protocol for Cloud account (except Yealink Cloud account). Navigate to: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m= mod_data&p=account-cloud&q=load &acc=0 Configure the H.239 protocol for H.323 calls. Phone User Interface Configure the BFCP protocol for SIP IP calls.
  • Page 824 0 or 1 (X ranges from 1 to 16) Description: Enables or disables the BFCP protocol for Cloud account X (except Yealink Cloud account). 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. Web User Interface: Account->Cloud Account->BFCP...
  • Page 825 Configuring Advanced Features Parameters Permitted Values Default None To configure H.239 protocol via web user interface: Click Account->H.323. Select a desired value from the pull-down list of H.239. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure BFCP protocol for SIP IP call via web user interface: Click Account->SIP IP Call.

  • Page 826: H.323 Tunneling

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To configure BFCP protocol for Cloud account (except Yealink Cloud account) via web user interface: Click Account->Cloud Account. Select the desired account from the pull-down list of Account. Select a desired value from the pull-down list of BFCP.
  • Page 827 Configuring Advanced Features If H.323 tunneling feature is disabled, the setup processes of an H.323 call are shown below:...
  • Page 828 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones If H.323 tunneling feature is enabled on both sites, the setup processes of an H.323 call are shown below: Before configuring H.323 tunneling locally, you need to enable the video conferencing feature Note first.
  • Page 829 Configuring Advanced Features Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default account_h323.tunneling.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the H.323 tunneling. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. Web User Interface: Account->H.323->H.323 Tunneling Phone User Interface: Menu->Advanced (default password: admin) ->VC Account->H.323->H.323 Tunneling To configure H.323 tunneling feature via web user interface: Click Account->H.323.

  • Page 830: H.460 Firewall Traversal

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Tap the H.323 Tunneling field and then tap the desired value in the pop-up dialog box. Tap the Save soft key. H.460 Firewall Traversal H.323 includes signal based on TCP, while the STUN solution cannot realize the NAT traversal of TCP.
  • Page 831 Configuring Advanced Features Procedure H.460 firewall traversal feature can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the H.460 firewall traversal feature. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: account_h323.h460.enable Configure the H.460 firewall traversal feature. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m= Local mod_data&p=account-h323&q=load &acc=0...

  • Page 832: Intelligent Firewall Traversal

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select a desired value from the pull-down list of H.460 Active. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure H.460 firewall traversal feature via phone user interface: ->Advanced (default password: admin) ->VC Account->H.323.
  • Page 833 Configuring Advanced Features Procedure Intelligent firewall traversal feature can be configured using the configuration files. Configure the intelligent firewall traversal feature. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: network.intelligent_firewall_traversal.e nable Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default network.intelligent_firewall_traversal.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the intelligent firewall traversal feature.
  • Page 834 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure H.235 encryption feature can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the H.235 encryption feature. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: account_h323.h235_type Configure the H.235 encryption feature. Navigate to: Web User Interface http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=...
  • Page 835 Configuring Advanced Features Select a desired value from the pull-down list of H.235 Encryption. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure H.235 encryption feature via phone user interface: ->Advanced (default password: admin) ->VC Account->H.323. Tap the H.235 Encryption field and then tap the desired value in the pop-up dialog box. Tap the Save soft key.
  • Page 836 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones...

  • Page 837: Configuring Audio Features

    Configuring Audio Features Configuring Audio Features This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following audio features: Ring Tones  Distinctive Ring Tones  Tones  Voice Mail Tone  Headset Prior  Dual Headset  Sending Volume ...
  • Page 838 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameter: phone_setting.ring_type Specify the access URL of the custom ring tone. Parameter: ringtone.url Delete all custom ring tone files. Parameter: ringtone.delete Configure a ring tone for account X. <MAC>.cfg Parameter: account.X.ringtone.ring_type Upload the custom ring tones.
  • Page 839 Configuring Audio Features For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servle t?m=mod_data&p=account-basi c&q=load&acc=0 Configure a ring tone for the IP phone. Phone User Interface Configure a ring tone for the account. Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default Refer to the following Refer to the following phone_setting.ring_type content...
  • Page 840 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default It means account1 will use the ring tone selected for the IP phone configured by the parameter "phone_setting.ring_type". Permitted Values: Common, Ring1.wav, Ring2.wav, Ring3.wav, Ring4.wav, Ring5.wav, Ring6.wav, Ring7.wav, Ring8.wav, Silent.wav, Splash.wav or custom ring tone name (e.g., Customring.wav).
  • Page 841 Configuring Audio Features To upload a custom ring tone via web user interface: Click on Settings->Preference. In the Upload Ringtone field, click Browse to locate a ring tone file (the file format must be *.wav) from your local system. Click Upload to upload the file. The custom ring tone appears in the pull-down list of Ring Type.

  • Page 842: Distinctive Ring Tones

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To change the ring tone for the account via web user interface: Click on Account->Basic. Select the desire account from the pull-down list of Account. Select the desired ring tone from the pull-down list of Ring Type.
  • Page 843 Configuring Audio Features Alert-Info headers in the following four formats: Alert-Info: Bellcore-drN Alert-Info: ringtone-N (or Alert-Info: MyMelodyN) Alert-Info: <URL> Alert-Info: info=info text;x-line-id=0 1) Alert-Info: Bellcore-drN When the Alter-Info header contains the keyword “Bellcore-drN”, the IP phone will play the desired ring tone. The following table identifies the corresponding ring tone: Ring Tone Ring Tone...
  • Page 844 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones The following table identifies the different Bellcore ring tone patterns and cadences (These ring tones are designed for the BroadWorks server). Minimum Nominal Maximum Pattern Cade Bellcore Tone Pattern Duration Duration...
  • Page 845 Configuring Audio Features Alert-Info: <http://10.1.0.31>;info=ringtone-2 Alert-Info: <http://127.0.0.1/ringtone-2> Alert-Info: MyMelody2 Alert-Info: MyMelody2;x-line-id=1 Alert-Info: <http://10.1.0.31>;x-line-id=0;info=MyMelody2 The following table identifies the corresponding local ring tone: Value of N Ring Tone Ring1.wav Ring2.wav Ring3.wav Ring4.wav Ring5.wav Ring6.wav Ring7.wav Ring8.wav Silent.wav Splash.wav N<1 or N>10 Ring1.wav 3) Alert-Info: <URL>...

  • Page 846: Auto Answer On

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Text (the ring tone can be configured by the parameter “distinctive_ring_tones.alert_info.X.ringer”). If no internal ringer text maps, the IP phone will play the preconfigured local ring tone in about 10 seconds.
  • Page 847 Configuring Audio Features Configure distinctive ring tones. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/ T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? m=mod_data&p=account-adv&q =load&acc=0 For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? m=mod_data&p=account-adv&q =load&acc=0 Web User Interface Local Configure the internal ringer text and internal ringer file. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/ T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? m=mod_data&p=settings-ring&q =load...
  • Page 848 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2)
  • Page 849 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the desired ring tones for each internal ringer text. The value ranges from 1 to 10, the digit stands for the appropriate ring tone. 1-Ring1.wav 2-Ring2.wav 3-Ring3.wav 4-Ring4.wav 5-Ring5.wav 6-Ring6.wav 7-Ring7.wav 8-Ring8.wav 9-Silent.wav 10-Splash.wav...

  • Page 850: Tones

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Distinctive Ring Tones. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the internal ringer text and internal ringer file via web user interface: Click on Settings->Ring.
  • Page 851 Configuring Audio Features IP phone. The default tones used on IP phones are the US tone sets. Available tone sets for IP phones: Australia  Austria  Brazil  Belgium  China  Czech  Denmark  Finland  France ...
  • Page 852 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Condition Description Congestion When the network is congested Call waiting tone (For more information on call Call Waiting waiting, refer to Call Waiting) Dial Recall When receiving a call back Info...
  • Page 853 Configuring Audio Features http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? p=settings-tones&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? m=mod_data&p=settings-tones& q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default voice.tone.country Refer to the following content Custom Description: Configures the country tone for the IP phone. Permitted Values: Custom, Australia, Austria, Brazil, Belgium, Chile, China, Czech, Czech ETSI, Denmark, Finland, France, Germany, Great Britain, Greece, Hungary, Lithuania, India, Italy, Japan, Mexico, New Zealand, Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, Spain, Switzerland, Sweden, Russia, United States.
  • Page 854 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default You can configure at most eight different tones for one condition, and separate them by commas. (e.g., 250/200,0/1000,200+300/500,200+500+800+1500/1000). If you want the IP phone to play tones once, add an exclamation mark “!” before tones (e.g., !250/200,0/1000,200+300/500,200+500+800+1500/1000).
  • Page 855 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Customizes the tone when the network is congested. The value format is Freq/Duration. For more information on the value format, refer to the parameter “voice.tone.dial”. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.tone.country” is set to Custom. Web User Interface: Settings->Tones->Congestion Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 856 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Customizes the info tone. The phone will play the info tone with the special information, for example, the number you are calling is not in service.

  • Page 857: Voice Mail Tone

    Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Customizes the warning tone for auto answer. The value format is Freq/Duration. For more information on the value format, refer to the parameter “voice.tone.dial”. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.tone.country” is set to Custom. Web User Interface: Settings->Tones->Auto Answer Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 858 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones tone when the IP phone receives a new voice mail. Parameter: features.voice_mail_tone_enable Configure whether to play a warning tone when the IP phone receives a new voice mail. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2...

  • Page 859: Headset Prior

    Configuring Audio Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Voice Mail Tone. Click Confirm to accept the change. Headset Prior Headset prior allows users to use headset preferentially if a headset is physically connected to the IP phone. This feature is especially useful for permanent or full-time headset users. Note It is not applicable to CP860 IP phones.
  • Page 860 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones et?m=mod_data&p=features-g eneral&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default features.headset_prior 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables headset prior feature. You need to press the HEADSET key to activate the headset mode in advance.

  • Page 861: Dual Headset

    Configuring Audio Features Click Confirm to accept the change. Dual Headset Dual headset allows users to use two headsets on one IP phone. To use this feature, users need to physically connect two headsets to the headset and handset jacks respectively. Once the IP phone connects to a call, the user with the headset connected to the headset jack has full-duplex capabilities, while the user with the headset connected to the handset jack is only able to listen.

  • Page 862: Sending Volume

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), users can use two headsets on one phone. When the IP phone joins in a call, the users with the headset connected to the headset jack have a full-duplex conversation, while the users with the headset connected to the handset jack are only allowed to listen to.
  • Page 863 Configuring Audio Features Procedure Sending volume can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the sending volume of the speaker. Parameter: voice.handfree_send Configure the sending volume of the handset. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: voice.handset_send Configure the sending volume of the headset.
  • Page 864 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Features->Audio->Handfree Send Volume (-50~50) Phone User Interface: None voice.handset_send Integer from -50 to 50 Description: Configures the sending volume of the handset.

  • Page 865: Audio Codecs

    Configuring Audio Features Enter the desired value in the Handfree Send Volume (-50~50) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that the settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. Audio Codecs CODEC is an abbreviation of COmpress-DECompress, capable of coding or decoding a digital data stream or signal by implementing an algorithm.

  • Page 866: Audio Codecs On

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones The following table summarizes the supported audio codecs on IP phones: Sample Packetization Codec Algorithm Reference Bit Rate Rate Time 20ms G.722.1c RFC 5577 48 Kbps 32 Ksps G.722.1 20ms G.722.1c...
  • Page 867 Configuring Audio Features The corresponding attributes of the codec are listed as follows: For SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2: Codec Configuration Priority RTPmap Methods Configuration Files G722 Web User Interface Configuration Files PCMU Web User Interface Configuration Files PCMA Web User Interface Configuration Files G729 Web User Interface...
  • Page 868 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Codec Configuration Priority RTPmap Methods Configuration Files G.722.1C(32kb/s) Web User Interface Configuration Files G.722.1C(24kb/s) Web User Interface Configuration Files G.722.1(24kb/s) Web User Interface Configuration Files G722 Web User Interface Configuration Files...
  • Page 869 Configuring Audio Features Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files or locally. Configure the codecs to use for SIP account. Parameters: account.X.codec.Y.enable account.X.codec.Y.payload_type Configure the priority and rtpmap for the enabled codec. Parameters: account.X.codec.Y.priority <MAC>.cfg account.X.codec.Y.rtpmap Configure the sample rate for the Configuration File Opus codec.
  • Page 870 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configure the codecs to use for SIP account. Configure the priority for the enabled codec. Configure the sample rate for the Opus codec. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29 G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p= account-codec&q=load&acc=0...
  • Page 871 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values 1-Enabled X ranges from 1 to 16 (for SIP VP-T49G/SIP-T48G/T46G/T29G) X ranges from 1 to 12 (for SIP-T42G) X ranges from 1 to 6 (for SIP-T41P/T27P) X ranges from 1 to 3 (for SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G) X ranges from 1 to 2 (for SIP-T21(P) E2) X is equal to 1 (for SIP-T19(P) E2/CP860) Y ranges from 1 to 15 (for SIP VP-T49G)
  • Page 872 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values When Y=8, the default value is 0; When Y=9, the default value is 0; When Y=10, the default value is 0; When Y=11, the default value is 0;...
  • Page 873 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Y ranges from 1 to 9 (for SIP-T40P/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2) Permitted Values: For SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: G722, PCMU, PCMA, G729, G726-16, G726-24, G726-32, G726-40, iLBC, G723_53, G723_63 For SIP VP-T49G: G722.1c(48kb/s), G722.1c(32kb/s), G722.1c(24kb/s), G722.1(24kb/s), G722, PCMU, PCMA, G729, G726-16, G726-24, G726-32, G726-40, iLBC, G723, Opus For SIP VP-T49G: When Y=1, the default value is PCMU;...
  • Page 874 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values When Y=11, the default value is G726-40; For SIP-T40P/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2: When Y=1, the default value is PCMU; When Y=2, the default value is PCMA; When Y=3, the default value is G729;...
  • Page 875 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values When Y=4, the default value is 7; When Y=5, the default value is 4; When Y=6, the default value is 12; When Y=7, the default value is 11; When Y=8, the default value is 10; When Y=9, the default value is 9;...
  • Page 876 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values account.1.codec.1.priority = 2 Note: For SIP VP-T49G IP phones, numerical value 0 is defined as the highest priority in the enable codec list and disable codec list. For...
  • Page 877 Configuring Audio Features Permitted Parameters Default Values When Y=12, the default value is 121; When Y=13, the default value is 122; When Y=14, the default value is 123; When Y=15, the default value is 124; For SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T29G/CP860: When Y=1, the default value is 0; When Y=2, the default value is 8;...
  • Page 878 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values Opus-MB or Opus-NB Description: Configures the sample rate for the Opus codec. Opus-FB-Opus-FB(48KHz) Opus-SWB-Opus-SWB(24KHz) Opus-WB-Opus-WB(16KHz) Opus-MB-Opus-MB(12KHz) Opus-NB-Opus-NB(8KHz) Example: account.1.codec.11.para = Opus-FB means the Opus codec will use 48KHz sample rate.
  • Page 879 Note: Different devices have different definition about how some Codecs are stored (Big-endian or little-endian), which may lead to the audio incompatibility problems between Yealink and certain devices. You can enable the special audio codec byte sequence feature to solve these incompatibility problems. It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones.
  • Page 880 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To adjust the priority of codecs, select the desired codec and then click Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure sample rate for the Opus codec via web user interface: Click on Account->Codec.

  • Page 881: Acoustic Clarity Technology

    Configuring Audio Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of PTime(ms). Click Confirm to accept the change. Acoustic Clarity Technology Acoustic Echo Cancellation Acoustic Echo Cancellation (AEC) is used to reduce acoustic echo from a voice call to provide natural full-duplex communication patterns.
  • Page 882 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configure AEC. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/ T40P/T29G/T27P/T23P/T23 G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: Web User Interface Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/s ervlet?p=settings-voice&q= load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/s ervlet?m=mod_data&p=set tings-voice&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default voice.echo_cancellation...

  • Page 883: Background Noise Suppression

    Configuring Audio Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of ECHO. Click Confirm to accept the change. Background Noise Suppression Background noise suppression (BNS) is designed primarily for hands-free operation and reduces background noise to enhance communication in noisy environments. Automatic Gain Control Automatic Gain Control (AGC) is applicable to hands-free operation and is used to keep audio output at nearly a constant level by adjusting the gain of signals in certain circumstances.
  • Page 884 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/ T40P/T29G/T27P/T23P/T23 G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/s ervlet?p=settings-voice&q= load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/s ervlet?m=mod_data&p=set tings-voice&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default voice.vad 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the VAD (Voice Activity Detection) feature on the IP phone.

  • Page 885: Comfort Noise Generation

    Configuring Audio Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of VAD. Click Confirm to accept the change. Comfort Noise Generation Comfort Noise Generation (CNG) is used to generate background noise for voice communications during periods of silence in a conversation. It is a part of the silence suppression or VAD handling for VoIP technology.
  • Page 886 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones voice.cng Configure CNG. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40 P/T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: Web User Interface Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl et?p=settings-voice&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servl et?m=mod_data&p=settings-vo ice&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default voice.cng...

  • Page 887: Jitter Buffer

    Configuring Audio Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of CNG. Click Confirm to accept the change. Jitter Buffer Jitter buffer is a shared data area where voice packets can be collected, stored, and sent to the voice processor in even intervals. Jitter is a term indicating variations in packet arrival time, which can occur because of network congestion, timing drift or route changes.
  • Page 888 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=s ettings-voice&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m= mod_data&p=settings-voice&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default voice.jib.adaptive 0 or 1 Description: Configures the type of jitter buffer. 0-Fixed 1-Adaptive Web User Interface: Settings->Voice->JITTER BUFFER->Type...
  • Page 889 Configuring Audio Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None voice.jib.normal Integer from 20 to 300 Description: Configures the normal delay time (in milliseconds) of jitter buffer. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “voice.jib.adaptive” is set to 0 (Fixed). Web User Interface: Settings->Voice->JITTER BUFFER->Normal Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 890 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones...

  • Page 891: Configuring Video Features

    Configuring Video Features Configuring Video Features The SIP VP-T49G IP phones support transmission and reception of high quality video images. The video is compatible with RFC 3984 - RTP Payload Format for H.264 Video, RFC 4629 - RTP Payload Format for ITU-T Rec. H.263 Video. This section provides information for making configuration changes for the following video-related features: Video Settings...
  • Page 892 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Glossary Description trails. A 3D filter goes one step farther and effectively reduces the noise in static images and images with movement. Effectively compensates the camera when shooting in a backlight Compensation environment.
  • Page 893 Configuring Video Features =mod_data&p=settings-camera&q =load Configure the video settings. Phone User Interface Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default video.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the video call feature for the IP phone. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), video is not sent in outgoing calls and not received in incoming calls.
  • Page 894 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default video.auto_answer_video_mute.enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables auto answer video mute feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), video transmission from the near site starts when an incoming call is automatically answered.
  • Page 895 Parameters Permitted Values Default 0-Auto-Yealink recommends this setting for most situations. It calculates the best white balance setting based on lighting conditions in the room. 5-Manual-Manual set red and blue gain. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “camera.scene_mode” is set to 0 (Manual).
  • Page 896 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “camera.scene_mode” is set to 0 (Manual). It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones. Web User Interface: Settings->Camera->Sharpness...
  • Page 897 Configuring Video Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Menu->Basic->Camera Setting->Saturation camera.nr2d_level Integer from 0 to 100 Description: Specifies the noise reduction (2D) mode. 0-Off 1-32-Low 33-65-Middle 66-100-Hight Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “camera.scene_mode” is set to 0 (Manual). It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones.
  • Page 898 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 60-60Hz Note: Indoor lights powered by a 50Hz or 60Hz power source can produce a flicker. You can adjust the camera flicker frequency according to the power source the light is powered by. It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones.
  • Page 899 Configuring Video Features Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Flicker. Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Video Icon on Status Bar. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the camera settings via phone user interface: ->Basic->Camera Setting.

  • Page 900: Video Codecs

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Auto Answer Video Mute. Click Confirm to accept the change. Video Codecs CODEC is an abbreviation of COmTap-DEComTap, capable of coding or decoding a digital data stream or signal by implementing an algorithm.
  • Page 901 Configuring Video Features Name MIME Type Bit Rate Frame Rate Frame Size 540P, 720P, 1080P H.264 HP H264/90000 Rx: Conventional Size Below 1080P Procedure Configuration changes can be performed using the configuration files or locally. Configure the video codecs to use for SIP account.
  • Page 902 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Permitted Parameters Default Values When Y=3, the default value is 1; When Y=4, the default value is 1; Example: If you want to enable the codec H264 on the account 1, you need to configure the following two parameters: account.1.video.1.enable = 1...

  • Page 903: Video Codecs On

    Configuring Video Features Permitted Parameters Default Values Description: Configures the priority of the enabled video codec for SIP account X. Default: When Y=1, the default value is 2; When Y=2, the default value is 3; When Y=3, the default value is 1; When Y=4, the default value is 4;...
  • Page 904 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To adjust the priority of codecs, select the desired codec and then click Click Confirm to accept the change. If you want to enable the codec H264HP via web user interface, you should enable the codec Note H264 at the same time.

  • Page 905: Configuring Security Features

    Configuring Security Features Configuring Security Features This chapter provides information for making configuration changes for the following security-related features: User Password  Administrator Password  Auto-Logout Time  Phone Lock  Transport Layer Security  Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol  Encrypting Configuration Files ...
  • Page 906 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones =security&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=security&q=load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default security.user_password String within 32 characters user Description: Configures the password of the user for phone’s web user interface access.

  • Page 907: Administrator Password

    Configuring Security Features Click Confirm to accept the change. Note If logging into the web user interface of the phone with the user credential, you need to enter the old user password in the Old Password field. Administrator Password Advanced menu options are strictly used by administrators. Users can configure them only if they have administrator privileges.

  • Page 908: Auto-Logout Time

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default Example: security.user_password = admin:123 means setting the password of administrator (current user name is “admin”) to password 123. Note: IP phones support ASCII characters 32-126(0x20-0x7E) in passwords. You can set the password to be empty via web user interface only.
  • Page 909 Configuring Security Features must re-enter username and password for web access authentication. Procedure Auto-logout time can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure auto-logout time. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: features.relog_offtime Configure auto-logout time. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: Web User Interface Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p...

  • Page 910: Phone Lock

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Enter the desired auto-logout time in Auto-Logout Time(1~1000min) field. Click Confirm to accept the change. Phone Lock Phone lock is used to lock the IP phone to prevent it from unauthorized use. Once the IP phone is locked, a user must enter the password to unlock it.
  • Page 911 Configuring Security Features Configure the IP phone to automatically lock the phone after a time interval. Parameter: phone_setting.phone_lock.lock_time_out Configure emergency numbers. Parameter: phone_setting.emergency.number Assign a phone lock key. Parameters: linekey.X.type/ programablekey.X.type/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.type linekey.X.label/ programablekey.X.label/ expansion_module.X.key.Y.label Configure the phone lock type. Change the unlock PIN.
  • Page 912 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Change the unlock PIN. Configure the IP phone to automatically lock the phone after a time interval. Assign a phone lock key. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting.phone_lock.enable...
  • Page 913 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Configures the password for unlocking the phone. Web User Interface: Features->Phone Lock->Phone Unlock PIN (0~15 Digit) Phone User Interface: Menu->Settings->Basic Settings->Change PIN phone_setting.phone_lock.lock_time_out Integer from 0 to 3600 Description: Configures the interval (in seconds) to automatically lock the phone. The default value is 0 (the phone is locked only by long pressing the pound key or pressing the phone lock key).
  • Page 914 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None Phone Lock Type The following table lists the operation behavior when configuring the type of phone lock: All Keys Function Keys Menu key Allow Behavior: You are allowed to press...

  • Page 915: Phone Lock Key

    Configuring Security Features All Keys Function Keys Menu key Allow Behavior: You are allowed to press the Line Key (key type is line), input or modify numbers, dial emergency numbers and return to idle screen. Keys not Locked: IME, More, Cancel, Send, Delete and Line soft key;...
  • Page 916 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameter Permitted Values Default linekey.X.type/ Refer to the programablekey.X.type/ following content expansion_module.X.key.Y.type Description: Configures a DSS key as a phone lock key on the IP phone. The digit 50 stands for the key type Phone Lock.
  • Page 917 Configuring Security Features Parameter Permitted Values Default For SIP-T41P IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-15 is 0. For SIP-T27P IP phones: The default value of the line key 1-6 is 15, and the default value of the line key 7-21 is 0. For SIP-T40P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2 IP phones: The default value is 15.
  • Page 918 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=8, the default value is 0 (NA). When X=9, the default value is 33 (Status).
  • Page 919 Configuring Security Features Parameter Permitted Values Default When X=2, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=3, the default value is 5 (DND). When X=4, the default value is 30 (Menu). When X=5, the default value is 28 (History). When X=6, the default value is 61 (Directory). When X=7, the default value is 0 (NA).
  • Page 920 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameter Permitted Values Default For programable keys: X ranges from 1 to 4. For ext keys: X ranges from 1 to 6, Y ranges from 1 to 20, 22 to 40 (Ext key 21 cannot be configured).

  • Page 921: Transport Layer Security

    Configuring Security Features (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the LCD screen in the Label field. Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the type of phone lock via phone user interface: Press Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Phone Lock. Press , or the Switch soft key to select the desired value from the Lock Enable field.
  • Page 922 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones TLS Record Protocol completes the actual data transmission and ensures the integrity and privacy of the data. The TLS Handshake Protocol allows the server and client to authenticate each other and negotiate an encryption algorithm and cryptographic keys before data is exchanged.

  • Page 923: Appendix C: Trusted Certificates On

    Configuring Security Features EXP1024-RC4-MD5  EXP-EDH-RSA-DES-CBC-SHA  EXP-EDH-DSS-DES-CBC-SHA  EXP-DES-CBC-SHA  EXP-RC4-MD5  The following figure illustrates the TLS messages exchanged between the IP phone and TLS server to establish an encrypted communication channel: Step1: IP phone sends “Client Hello” message proposing SSL options. Step2: Server responds with “Server Hello”...
  • Page 924 A unique server certificate: It is unique to an IP phone (based on the MAC address) and issued by the Yealink Certificate Authority (CA). A generic server certificate: It issued by the Yealink Certificate Authority (CA). Only if no unique certificate exists, the IP phone may send a generic certificate for authentication.
  • Page 925 Configuring Security Features Upload the trusted certificates. Parameter: trusted_certificates.url Delete all uploaded trusted certificates. Parameter: trusted_certificates.delete Upload the server certificates. Parameter: server_certificates.url Delete all uploaded server certificates. Parameter: server_certificates.delete Configure the custom certificates. Parameter: phone_setting.reserve_certs_enable Configure TLS for SIP account. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/ T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P)
  • Page 926 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=m od_data&p=trusted-cert&q=load Configure server certificates feature. Upload the server certificates. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29G/ T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p=ser ver-cert&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m=m od_data&p=server-cert&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.sip_server.Y.transport_type...
  • Page 927 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default security.trust_certificates 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to only trust the server certificates in the Trusted Certificates list. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 0 (Disabled), the IP phone will trust the server no matter whether the certificate sent by the server is valid or not.
  • Page 928 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to mandatorily validate the CommonName or SubjectAltName of the certificate sent by the server. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 929 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Phone User Interface: None trusted_certificates.delete http://localhost/all Blank Description: Deletes all uploaded trusted certificates. Example: trusted_certificates.delete = http://localhost/all Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None URL within 511 server_certificates.url Blank characters Description: Configures the access URL of the certificate the IP phone sends for authentication. Example: server_certificates.url = http://192.168.1.20/ca.pem Note: The certificate you want to upload must be in *.pem or *.cer format.
  • Page 930 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default phone_setting.reserve_certs_enable 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to reserve custom certificates after it is reset to factory defaults. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled Web User Interface:...
  • Page 931 Configuring Security Features Select the desired values from the pull-down lists of Only Accept Trusted Certificates, Common Name Validation and CA Certificates. Click Confirm to accept the change. To upload a trusted certificate via web user interface: Click on Security->Trusted Certificates. Click Browse to select the certificate (*.pem, *.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system.

  • Page 932: Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired value from the pull-down list of Device Certificates. Click Confirm to accept the change. To upload a server certificate via web user interface: Click on Security->Server Certificates. Click Browse to select the certificate (*.pem and *.cer) from your local system.
  • Page 933 Configuring Security Features a=crypto:2 AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_32 inline:NzkyM2FjNzQ2ZDgxYjg0MzQwMGVmMGUxMzdmNWFm a=crypto:3 F8_128_HMAC_SHA1_80 inline:NDliMWIzZGE1ZTAwZjA5ZGFhNjQ5YmEANTMzYzA0 a=rtpmap:0 PCMU/8000 a=rtpmap:8 PCMA/8000 a=rtpmap:18 G729/8000 a=fmtp:18 annexb=no a=rtpmap:9 G722/8000 a=fmtp:101 0-15 a=rtpmap:101 telephone-event/8000 a=ptime:20 a=sendrecv The callee receives the INVITE message with the RTP encryption algorithm, and then answers the call by responding with a 200 OK message which carries the negotiated RTP encryption algorithm.
  • Page 934 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Configure SRTP feature for account X. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/ T29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: Web User Interface Local http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? p=account-adv&q=load&acc=0 For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? m=mod_data&p=account-adv&q =load&acc=0 Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default account.X.srtp_encryption...

  • Page 935: Encrypting Configuration Files

    Encrypted configuration files can be downloaded from the provisioning server to protect against unauthorized access and tampering of sensitive information (e.g., login passwords, registration information). Yealink supplies a configuration encryption tool for encrypting configuration files. The encryption tool encrypts plaintext <y0000000000xx>.cfg and <MAC>.cfg files (one by one or in batch) using 16-character symmetric keys (the same or different keys for configuration files) and generates encrypted configuration files with the same file name as before.

  • Page 936: Procedure To Encrypt Configuration Files

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones For a Microsoft Windows platform, you can use a Yealink-supplied encryption tool "Config_Encrypt_Tool.exe" to encrypt the <y0000000000xx>.cfg and <MAC>.cfg files respectively. Yealink also supplies a configuration encryption tool (yealinkencrypt) for Linux platform if...
  • Page 937 Configuring Security Features The tool uses the file folder “Encrypted” as the target directory by default. (Optional.) Mark the desired radio box in the AES Model field. If you mark the Manual radio box, you can enter an AES key in the AES KEY field or click Re-Generate to generate an AES key in the AES KEY field.
  • Page 938 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure Decryption method can be configured using the configuration files. Configure the decryption method. Parameter: auto_provision.aes_key_in_file <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Configure AES keys. Parameters: auto_provision.aes_key_16.com auto_provision.aes_key_16.mac Configure AES keys. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T29...
  • Page 939 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default plaintext AES keys configured on the IP phone. Web User Interface: None Phone User Interface: None auto_provision.aes_key_16.com 16 characters Blank Description: Configures the plaintext AES key for decrypting the Common CFG file. The valid characters contain: 0 ~ 9, A ~ Z, a ~ z and the following special characters are also supported: # $ % * + , - .

  • Page 940: 802.1X Authentication

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To configure AES keys via web user interface: Click on Settings->Auto Provision. Enter the values in the Common AES Key and MAC-Oriented AES Key fields. AES keys must be 16 characters and the supported characters contain: 0-9, A-Z, a-z and the following special characters are also supported: # $ % * + , - .
  • Page 941 Configuring Security Features Yealink 802.1X Authentication For more information on 802.1X authentication, refer to Procedure 802.1X authentication can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the 802.1X authentication. Parameters: network.802_1x.mode <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File network.802_1x.identity network.802_1x.md5_password network.802_1x.root_cert_url network.802_1x.client_cert_url Configure the 802.1X authentication.
  • Page 942 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default 3-EAP-PEAP/MSCHAPv2 4-EAP-TTLS/EAP-MSCHAPv2 5-EAP-PEAP/GTC 6-EAP-TTLS/EAP-GTC 7-EAP-FAST Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->802.1x->802.1x Mode Phone User Interface: Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Network->802.1x...
  • Page 943 Configuring Security Features Parameters Permitted Values Default Web User Interface: Network->Advanced->802.1x->MD5 Password Phone User Interface: Menu->Settings->Advanced Settings (default password: admin) ->Network->802.1x Settings->MD5 Password network.802_1x.root_cert_url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL of the CA certificate Example: network.802_1x.root_cert_url = http://192.168.1.10/ca.pem Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “network.802_1x.mode”...
  • Page 944 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones a) If you select EAP-MD5: 1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. 2) Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field. b) If you select EAP-TLS: 1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field.
  • Page 945 Configuring Security Features 5) Click Upload to upload the certificates. c) If you select EAP-PEAP/MSCHAPv2: 1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. 2) Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field. 3) In the CA Certificates field, click Browse to select the desired CA certificate (*.pem, *.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system.
  • Page 946 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones 4) Click Upload to upload the certificate. d) If you select EAP-TTLS/EAP-MSCHAPv2: 1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. 2) Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field.
  • Page 947 Configuring Security Features 4) Click Upload to upload the certificate. e) If you select EAP-PEAP/GTC: 1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. 2) Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field.
  • Page 948 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones 3) In the CA Certificates field, click Browse to select the desired CA certificate (*.pem, *.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system. 4) Click Upload to upload the certificate. f) If you select EAP-TTLS/EAP-GTC: 1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field.
  • Page 949 Configuring Security Features 3) In the CA Certificates field, click Browse to select the desired CA certificate (*.pem, *.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system. 4) Click Upload to upload the certificate. g) If you select EAP-FAST: 1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. 2) Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field.
  • Page 950 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones 3) In the CA Certificates field, click Browse to select the desired CA certificate (*.pem, *.crt, *.cer or *.der) from your local system. 4) Click Upload to upload the certificate. Click Confirm to accept the change.
  • Page 951 Configuring Security Features 1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. 2) Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field. e) If you select EAP-PEAP/GTC: 1) Enter the user name for authentication in the Identity field. 2) Enter the password for authentication in the MD5 Password field.
  • Page 952 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones...

  • Page 953: Troubleshooting

    Troubleshooting Troubleshooting This chapter provides an administrator with general information for troubleshooting some common problems that he (or she) may encounter while using IP phones. Troubleshooting Methods IP phones can provide feedback in a variety of forms such as log files, packets, status indicators and so on, which can help an administrator more easily find the system problem and fix it.
  • Page 954 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones 4: warning conditions 5: normal but significant condition 6: informational syslog.mode – Specify the system log to be exported to the provisioning server, syslog  server or local system. syslog.server -- Specify the IP address or domain name of the syslog server to which the ...
  • Page 955 Troubleshooting od_data&p=settings-config&q=load Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default syslog.log_level Integer from 0 to 6 Description: Configures the detail level of syslog information to be exported. 0-system is unusable 1-action must be taken immediately 2-critical condition 3-error conditions 4-warning conditions 5-normal but significant condition 6-informational Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take...
  • Page 956 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired level from the pull-down list of System Log Level. Click Confirm to accept the change. The system log level is set as 6, the informational level. Informational level may make some sensitive information accessible (e.g., password dial...
  • Page 957 Troubleshooting Details of Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default syslog.mode 0, 1 or 2 Description: Configures the IP phone to export log files to the local system, syslog server or an FTP/TFTP Server (provisioning server). 0-Local 1-Server 2-FTP/TFTP Server Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect.
  • Page 958 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Click Export to open file download window, and then save the file to your local system. A log file named syslog.tar is successfully exported to your local system. To view the log file on your local system: Extract the combined log files to your local system.
  • Page 959 Troubleshooting Exporting the Log File to a Syslog Server Procedure Log setting can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the syslog mode. Parameter: syslog.mode Configure the IP address or domain <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File name of the syslog server where to export the log files.
  • Page 960 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default Note: If you change this parameter, the IP phone will reboot to make the change take effect. Web User Interface: Settings->Configuration->Export System Log Phone User Interface: None IP address or syslog.server...
  • Page 961 Troubleshooting For example, the IP address of your syslog server is 192.168.1.100. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt “Warning: Some settings you changed take effect when you restart your machine! Do you want to reboot now?”. The configuration will take effect after a reboot.
  • Page 962 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Exporting the Log File to a Provisioning Server (FTP/TFTP Server) Procedure Log setting can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure the syslog mode. Parameter: syslog.mode Configure the period of the log upload (in seconds) to the provisioning server.
  • Page 963 Troubleshooting Configure the syslog mode. Configure the period of the log upload (in seconds) to the provisioning server. Configure whether the log files on the provisioning server are overwritten or appended. Configure the maximum size of the log files on the provisioning server. Configure the phone to stop log upload or delete the old log when the log on the provisioning server reaches the max...
  • Page 964 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default syslog.mode 0, 1 or 2 Description: Configures the IP phone to export log files to the local system, syslog server or an FTP/TFTP Server (provisioning server).
  • Page 965 Troubleshooting Parameters Permitted Values Default If it is set to 1 (Post Append), the log files on the provisioning server are appended. If it is set to 2 (Post Stor), the log files on the provisioning server are overwritten. Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “syslog.mode” is set to 2 (FTP/TFTP Server).
  • Page 966 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Parameters Permitted Values Default None Integer from 1 to syslog.bootlog_upload_wait_time 86400 Description: Configures the waiting time (in seconds) before the phone uploads the log file to the provisioning server. Example: syslog.bootlog_upload_wait_time = 121 Note: It works only if the value of the parameter “syslog.mode”...
  • Page 967 Troubleshooting For example, if the IP address TFTP server is 192.168.1.100, then the URL “tftp://192.168.1.100/” is where the IP phone exports the system log. For more information Yealink_SIP-T2 Series_T19(P) E2_T4 on TFTP server, refer to Series_CP860_W56P_IP_Phones_Auto_Provisioning_Guide Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure the phone to export the system log to an FTP/TFTP server via web user interface: Click on Settings->Configuration.
  • Page 968 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Select the desired limit mode from the pull-down list of Append Limit Mode. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt “Warning: Some settings you changed take effect when you restart your machine! Do you want to reboot now?”.

  • Page 969: Capturing Packets

    Capturing the Packets via Web User Interface For Yealink IP phones, you can export the packets file to the local system and analyze it. If you capture the packets for SIP VP-T49G IP phones, you can configure the maximum size and the filter type of the packets.
  • Page 970 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Details of the Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default packet_capture.max_file_counts Integer from 1 to 100 Description: Configures the count of the number of packets to capture. Note: It is only applicable to SIP VP-T49G IP phones.
  • Page 971 Troubleshooting Parameters Permitted Values Default Customizes the packet filter string. If it is left blank, the IP phone will not automatically filter any string when capturing packets. Syntax: Protocol+Direction+Host(s)+ Value +Logical Operations+Other Expression Protocol: Values: ether, fddi, ip, arp, rarp, decnet, lat, sca, moprc, mopdl, tcp and udp. Application-level protocol, such as http, dns and sip are not supported.
  • Page 972 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To capture packets via web user interface (take SIP-T23G IP phones for example): Click on Settings->Configuration. Click Start to start capturing signal traffic. Reproduce the issue to get stack traces. Click Stop to stop capturing.
  • Page 973 Troubleshooting Click Export to open the file download window, and then save the file to your local system. Capturing the Packets Using the Ethernet Software Receiving data packets from the HUB Connect the Internet port of the IP phone and the PC to the same HUB, and then use Sniffer, Ethereal or Wireshark software to capture the signal traffic.
  • Page 974 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones =network-adv&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet? m=mod_data&p=network-adv&q =load Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default network.span_to_pc_port 0 or 1 Description: Enables or disables the IP phone to span data packets received from the WAN (Internet) port to the PC (LAN) port.

  • Page 975: Enabling Watch Dog Feature

    Troubleshooting Select Enabled from the pull-down list of Span to PC Port. Click Confirm to accept the change. A dialog box pops up to prompt that settings will take effect after a reboot. Click OK to reboot the phone. Then you can use Sniffer, Ethereal or Wireshark software to capture the signal traffic. Enabling Watch Dog Feature The IP phone provides a troubleshooting feature called “Watch Dog”, which helps you monitor the IP phone status and provides the ability to get stack traces from the last time the IP phone...
  • Page 976 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Procedure Watch Dog can be configured using the configuration files or locally. Configure Watch Dog feature. <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File Parameter: watch_dog.enable Configure Watch Dog feature. Navigate to: SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T 29G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860:...

  • Page 977: Getting Information From Status Indicators

    Troubleshooting Select the desired value from the pull-down list of WatchDog. Click Confirm to accept the change. Getting Information from Status Indicators Status indicators may consist of the power LED, MESSAGE key LED, line key indicator, headset key indicator and the on-screen icon. The following shows two examples of obtaining the IP phone information from status indicators on SIP-T23G IP phones: If a LINK failure of the IP phone is detected, a prompting message “Network unavailable”...
  • Page 978 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Call Stats Key For more information on how to configure the DSS Key, refer to Appendix D: Configuring DSS on page 987. Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameter Permitted Values Default Refer to the following linekey.X.type...
  • Page 979 Troubleshooting Click Confirm to accept the change. To configure a Call Stats key via phone user interface: ->Features->DSS Keys. Tap the desired line key. Tap the Type field and then tap Key Event in the pop-up dialog box. Tap the Key Type field and then tap Call Stats in the pop-up dialog box. (Optional.) Enter the string that will appear on the touch screen in the Label field.

  • Page 980: Analyzing Configuration File

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Analyzing Configuration File Wrong configurations may have an impact on your phone use. You can export configuration file to check the current configuration of the IP phone and troubleshoot if necessary. You can also import configuration files for a quick and easy configuration.
  • Page 981 Troubleshooting SIP-T48G/T46G/T42G/T41P/T40P/T2 9G/T27P/T23P/T23G/T21(P) E2/T19(P) E2/CP860: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?p =settings-config&q=load For SIP VP-T49G: http://<phoneIPAddress>/servlet?m =mod_data&p=settings-config&q=l Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default configuration.url URL within 511 characters Blank Description: Configures the access URL for the custom configuration files. Note: The file format of custom configuration file must be *.bin. Web User Interface: Settings->Configuration->Export or Import Configuration Phone User Interface:...
  • Page 982 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones To import a BIN configuration file via web user interface: Click on Settings->Configuration. In the Export or Import Configuration block, click Browse to locate a BIN configuration file from your local system.
  • Page 983 Troubleshooting To import CFG configuration files via web user interface: Click on Settings->Configuration.

  • Page 984: Exporting All The Diagnostic Files

    Click Import to import the configuration file. Exporting All the Diagnostic Files Yealink IP phones support three types of diagnostic files (including Pcap trace, log files and BIN configuration files) to help analyze your problem. You can export these files at a time and troubleshoot if necessary.

  • Page 985: Troubleshooting Solutions

    BIN Configuration Files on page 956. Troubleshooting Solutions This section describes solutions to common issues that may occur while using the IP phone. Upon encountering a scenario not listed in this section, contact your Yealink reseller for further support.

  • Page 986: Ip Address Issues

    Scenario 2: Yealink IP phones support using FTP, TFTP, HTTP and HTTPS protocols to download configuration files or resource files. You can use one of these protocols for provisioning. When provisioning your IP phone obtaining an IPv6 address, the provisioning server should tftp://[IPv6 support IPv6 and the format of the access URL of the provisioning server can be “...

  • Page 987: Time And Date Issues

    Troubleshooting Yealink_SIP-T2 Series_T19(P) E2_T4 information on provisioning, refer to Series_CP860_W56P_IP_Phones_Auto_Provisioning_Guide Time and Date Issues Why doesn’t the IP phone display time and date correctly? Check if the IP phone is configured to obtain the time and date from the NTP server automatically.

  • Page 988: Audio Issues

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones the same server. Audio Issues How to increase or decrease the volume? Press the volume key to increase or decrease the ringer volume when the IP phone is idle, or to adjust the volume of engaged audio device (handset, speakerphone or headset) when there is an active call in progress.

  • Page 989: Wi-Fi And Bluetooth Issues

    Troubleshooting Check whether the packet has been lost. For more information on packet loss, refer to  Getting Information from Talk Statistics on page 953. Ensure that camera settings are configured correctly, such as brightness and white balance.  Avoid high-intensity indoor light or direct sunlight on the camera. ...

  • Page 990: Firmware And Upgrading Issues

    Why can’t I connect the Bluetooth device with the IP phone all the time? Try to delete the registration information of the Bluetooth device on both IP phone and Bluetooth device, and then pair and connect it again. Contact Yealink field application engineer and your Bluetooth device manufacturer for more information.

  • Page 991: Provisioning Issues

    Troubleshooting Item Description 46: SIP-T29G  45: SIP-T27P  44: SIP-T23P/G  52: SIP-T21(P) E2  53: SIP-T19(P) E2  37: CP860  Firmware generation. Note: The larger it is, the newer the firmware generation is. A fixed number. Firmware version. Note: With the same firmware generation, the larger it is, the newer the firmware version is.

  • Page 992: System Log Issues

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones System Log Issues Why can’t I export the system log to a provisioning server (FTP/TFTP server)? Do one of the following: Ensure that the FTP/TFTP server is downloaded and installed on your local system.
  • Page 993 Troubleshooting The web user interface prompts the message “Do you want to reset to factory?”. Click OK to confirm the resetting. The IP phone will be reset to factory sucessfully after startup. Note Reset of your phone may take a few minutes. Do not power off until the phone starts up successfully.
  • Page 994 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones ta&p=settings-config&q=load Details of Configuration Parameters: Parameters Permitted Values Default features.custom_factory_config.enable 0 or 1 Description: Custom Enables or disables the Factory Configuration feature. 0-Disabled 1-Enabled If it is set to 1 (Enabled), Import Factory Configuration item will be displayed on the IP phone's web user interface at the path Settings->Configuration.
  • Page 995 Troubleshooting Click Browse to locate the custom factory configuration file from your local system. Click Import. When the custom factory configuration file is imported successrully, you can reset the IP phone to custom factory configurations. For more information on how to reset to factory configuration via web user interface, refer to How to reset the IP phone to default factory configurations? page 968.

  • Page 996: Rebooting Issues

    Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones The web user interface prompts the message “Are you sure delete user-defined factory configuration?”. Click OK to delete the custom factory configuration files. The imported custom factory file will be deleted. The IP phone will be reset to default factory configurations after resetting.
  • Page 997 Troubleshooting Procedure Changes can only be configured using the configuration files. Configure the IP phone behavior when receiving a SIP NOTIFY message which contains the header <y0000000000xx>.cfg Configuration File “Event: check-sync”. Parameter: sip.notify_reboot_enable Details of the Configuration Parameter: Parameter Permitted Values Default sip.notify_reboot_enable 0, 1 or 2...
  • Page 998 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones The LCD screen prompts the following warning: Press the OK soft key to reboot the phone. The phone begins rebooting. Any reboot of the phone may take a few minutes. To reboot the phone via web user interface: Click on Settings->Upgrade.

  • Page 999: Protocols And Ports Issues

    Troubleshooting Protocols and Ports Issues What communication protocols and ports do Yealink IP phones support? Source Destination Destination Port Source IP Source Port Destination IP Protocol Description of destination port Device Device (Listening port) IP address of IP IP phone or voice...
  • Page 1000 Administrator’s Guide for SIP-T2 Series/T19(P) E2/T4 Series/CP860 IP Phones Source Destination Destination Port Source IP Source Port Destination IP Protocol Description of destination port Device Device (Listening port) DHCP server obtain IP address from DHCP server. LDAP protocol port, it is used to...
  • Page 1001 Troubleshooting Source Destination Destination Port Source IP Source Port Destination IP Protocol Description of destination port Device Device (Listening port) gateway phone or destination IP phones phones receive audio stream. voice device. gateway IP address TR-069 protocol port, it is used TR-069 of TR-069 1024~65535...

This manual is also suitable for:

Sip-t19p e2/t4 seriesSip-t19 e2/t4 seriesCp860 series

Table of Contents